Giao An Tieng Anh Lop 10 Tron Bo

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date of preparing:10/08/2012 Period 1:
INTRODUCTION
I. Objectives: - To introduce the textbook- English 10 - To introduce the way of testing. - To set up some class regulations. - To give a fifteen- minute test. II. Procedures: 1. Textbook introduction: a. Contents: - Six themes:+ You and me + Education + Community + Nature and the environment + Recreation. + People and places. - Sixteen units. b. The Structure of the book: - There are sixteen units . In each unit , there are five main parts: Reading, Speaking, Listening, Writing + Language focus: - Pronunciation - Grammar and vocabulary. 2. The system of testing. 3. A fifteen- minute test. I. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets 1. The sun always (rise) .............. in the east. Look, it (rise) .......................................... 2. I don't think I (go) ...................... tonight. I'm too tired. 3. Where you ( spend) ........................... your summer holiday last year, Tam? 4. Mai (be) ........... very happy when she (receive) ........... a letter from her sister this morning. 5. Would you like (join) .. ...... my class next Sunday? We ( visit) ......... the local museum. II Complete the second setence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. I haven't been to Portugal since 1990. I last ..................................................................................................... ...................... 2. When did you start your course?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
How long have ................................................................................................... ......... 3. I know it belongs to them , because there's a label on it. I know it's....................................................................................................... ............. 4. I recognized him at once. At once I knew................................................................................................... ......... 5. The phone call interrupted my breakfast. I was ..................................................................................................... ....................... III. Choose the best answer 1. The boy like ( playing/ play) games but hate ( doing/ do) lessons. 2. Please stop( talking/ to talk/ talk); I'm trying ( to finish/ finishing/ finish) a letter to the Y& Y Green Group. 3. His doctor advised him( to give/giving) ( to smoke/ smoking). 4. By (working/ to work) day and night he succeeded in ( finishing/ to finish) the job in time. 5. After filling in the form , please (bring/take) it back to me. 6. The tourist needs ( finding/ to find) the police station because he has lost money. 7. is he able (can join/ to join) the Y & Y Green Group? 8. He doesn't enjoy ( playing/ to play) basketball. 9. Let him (does/ do) what he wants. 10. My mother is busy ( to cook/ cooking) Date of preparing:11/08/2012 Period 2:
UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......

LESSON 1: READING Date of teaching Students absence Notes
Class 10 10 10
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I- Objectives: - Students read and guess the meaning of words in contexts. - They read and answer questions about the texts. - They practise scanning specific information in the texts II Language focus : 1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people. 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense - The past simple tense. - Adverb of frequency. III- Skill: -Reading: read a passage about a day in the life of a farmer. IV. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm- up: 5 + Aims: to introduce the topic of the lesson and to raise sts' interest. - Ask sts to close their books - close their books - Deliver handouts, and ask sts to match a - match two columns noun in column A with a phrase in column B. A B 1. a teacher a. does homework 2. a doctor b. works in the field 3. a student c. delivers letters 4. a postman d. looks after patients 5. a farmer e. gives lessons - Ask ss to match quickly in one minute, then ask some ss to stand up to answer T's T : What does a teacher do? questions. S1 : He gives lessons T : What does a doctor do? S2 : He looks after patients. ......... T : What does a farmer do? - After the last question, T introduces the S5 : He works in the field. new lesson. 2. Before you read: 10 - Aims: to revise the present simple and to provide sts with some new words. - Ask sts to open their books and look at "Before you read" , explain what they are going to do. - Do the first example. T: What time do you often get up? S: I often get up at six - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and S1: What time do you often go to answer about their daily routine, using the school?
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
cues in the textbook. - Ask them to work in 3 minutes, meanwhile T moves round to help if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report . - Ask sts to look at the picture in the textbook and guess the man's job. - Introduce the topic of the reading passage: " A day in the life of a farmer" - Introduce some new words: - plough (v) ( the action of the man in the picture) - 'harrow (v) : ba - a plot of land (n) ( point at the picture) - 'peasant (n) : a poor farmer - pump(v) : bm - trans'plant (v)( use 2 words"plant" and "trans-" to explain). do the transplanting - Ask sts to listen and repeat these words twice, then ask some sts to read again. 3. While you read: - Aims: Sts practise reading + Task 1: - Ask sts to read the passage about a farmer, Mr. Vy and his wife, Mrs. Tuyet. and do Task1. - Ask sts to work individually in 5 minutes to do this task. - Guide sts to read through the passage , then focus on only the sentences surrounding the italicised words to do the task effectively. - Ask them to share their ideas with their parners. - Ask 4 sts to stand up to answer , then give remarks. - Translate number 4 into Vietnamese in case sts do not know the word " contented with" and three options. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the passage again and answer the questions about Mr. Vy and Mrs. Tuyet.
S2: I often go to school at 6.30 S3: What time do you often have breakfast? S4: I often have breakfast at 6.15. ............ S11: What do you often do in the evening? S12: I often do my homework. S: I think he is a farmer.
- Listen and repeat. - plough - peasant - harrow - pump - a plot of land - transplant
20
1. C 2. C 3. A 4. A
S1: What is Mr. Vy's occupation? S2: He is a farmer. S3: What time does he get up and what does he do after that?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask them to work in pairs , one asks and one answers. - Move round to make sure that all sts are working and to help them if necessary. - Ask some sts to report and give feedback .
S4: He gets up at 4.30, then he goes down to the kitchen to boil some water for his morning tea. S5: What does he do in the morning? S6: In the morning he ploughs and harrows his plot of land, + Task 3: drinks tea and smokes local - Ask sts to read the passage again , and tobacco during his break. explain what they are going to do. S7: What do Mr. Vy and his wife - Ask them to complete the note in 7 do in the afternoon? minutes, then discuss their answers with S8: They repair the banks of their their partners . plot of land. Mr. Vy pumps water - Ask three sts to report their answers into it while his wife does the aloud. transplanting. - Check and give remarks. S9: Are they happy with their lives or not? Why? S10: Yes, they are. Because they - Work in groups to discuss. love working and they love their - Ask one member of their groups to report children. if possible. 4. After you read: - In the morning: - Aims: to help sts to consolidate what + 4.30: The alrm goes off and they have read. Mr. Vy gets up, goes down to the - Ask sts to close their books. kitchen, boil water for tea, has a - Ask them to work in small groups of quick breakfast, leads the buffalo three or four to talk about Mr. Vy and to the field. Mrs. Tuyet's daily routines basing on their + 5.15: he leaves the house note in Task 3. + 5.30: he arrives in the field, - Encourage them to use their own words. ploughs and harrows his plot of - Ask one or two pairs to report. land. +7.45: He takes a rest + 10.30: he gose home + 11.30: he has lunch with his family. - In the afternoon: + 2.30: they go to the field again, repair the bank of the plot of land. He pumps water into it, she does the transplanting. + 6.00: they finish work. + 7.00: they have dinner. - After dinner: + They watch TV, sometimes they see their neighbours for a
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
cup of tea and chat with them. +10.00: they go to bed. 1 5. Homework: - Ask sts to write full passage about Mr. Vy and Mrs. Tuyet basing on what they have discussed in Post- Reading.
VI-EXPERIENCES: . . . .
Date of preparing:12/08/2012 Period 3: UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...... LESSON 2: SPEAKING I. Objectives: - Students work in pairs to ask and answer about one's daily activities using a timetable or pictures - They can talk about their daily routines. II-Language focus : 1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people. 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense - The past simple tense. - Adverb of frequency. III- Skill: -Speaking: Speak about time table of a student. IV. Teaching aids: - picture, board, chalks, textbook, handouts V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm-up: 5 - Aims: to revise the names of school - Close their books. subjects . - Work in groups of three or four - Ask sts to close their books. to match as quickly as possible. - Deliver the first handout. A B 1. Civic education a. Ton hc - Speak aloud their answers: 2. Technology b. Vt l 1-f ; 2-i ; 3 - a; 4 - g; 5 - b; 6 - j; 7 - k; 8 - d; 9 - e; 10 - h; 11 - c. 3. Maths c. Tin hc
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
4. Literature d. Th dc 5. Physics e. a l 6. Biology f. Gio dc CD 7. Chemistry g. Vn hc 8. Physical education h. Lch s 9. Geography i. Cng ngh 10. History j. Sinh hc 11. Informatics k. Ho hc - Ask them to match one item in column A with one item in column B. - Ask them to work in groups in 2 minutes, then check this exercise in chorus. - Ask sts to read aloud the names of these subjects in chorus. 2. Pre-Speaking - Aims: to introduce the verb tense and the way to tell clock time. - Introduce briefly what sts are going to do in this lesson. - Ask sts about the verb tense to use in talking about daily routines. - Remind sts of some rules of the present simple tense. - Recall the way of telling time. T: ( write on the board) 7.30 ans ask a st to read it aloud. - Write some more examples and ask sts to read aloud. - Ask sts about the question : - Ask sts to make question for the following sentence: " Mai goes to school at 6.30 a.m" - Ask sts to give more examples. 3. While- Speaking - Aims: Sts practise speaking in pairs + Task 1:
- The present simple tense.
S: seven thirty or half past seven.
S: The question begins with " What time..........?" S: What time does Mai go to school?
- Open the textbook. - Listen to the teacher. - Look at the timetable and try to understand it. S: He has a Civic Education lesson at 7.15a.m S: At 7.15 on Monday he has a Civic Education lesson.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to open their books. - Introduce the requirement of the task. - Ask sts to look at the timetable in the textbook and read through it. - Do the first example with a student. T: What time does Quan have a Civic Education lesson on Monday? T: What lesson does Quan have at 7.15 a.m on Monday? - Ask the whole class to read these sentences again. - ask two pairs to read again. - Ask sts to work in pairs in 10 minutes to ask and answer about Quan basing on the timetable. - Move round to hepl sts and to correct any mistakes if there are. - Ask five pairs to report because of the time limit. - Listen and give remarks. + Task 2: - " Quan is at school in the morning, and what does he do in the afternoon? Please look at pictures in task 2" - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer about Quan's activities. - do the first example: T: ( look at picture 1) What does Quan do at 2.00 p.m? - Ask sts to work in the same way, remind sts to use the present simple tense with the third person. - Move round to control the activity and to help sts if necessary. - After sts have discussed, T can aks a student to talk about all Quan's activities in the afternoon. 4. Post -Speaking: - Aims: sts practise speaking freely, they can express their own ideas. + Task 3: - Ask sts to think about themselves, and then work in small groups to tell their
S1: What time does Quan have a Literature lesson on Tuesday? S2: He has a literature lesson at 8.05 a.m S3: What lesson dose Quan have at 10.40 a.m on Thursday? S4: he has a Chemistry lesson. S5: What time does Quan have a Physics lesson on Wednesday? S6: He has a Physics lesson at 9.55 a.m S7: What lesson does Quan have at 8.55 on Friday? S8: He has an English lesson. S9: What time does Quan have a Class Meeting on Sarturday? S10: He has a class meeting at 10.40 a.m. - look at pitures in task 2 and think of the phrases to talk about Quan's activities.(eg: do his homework, get up,etc)
S: He gets up at 2.00 p.m
10
" At 2.00 p.m Quan gets up, he starts to study at 2.15 p.m. he studies until 4.30 and then he watches T.V. At 5.00 he rides to the football yard. At 5.15 he begins playing football. He goes home at about 6.30 p.m......."
- Think about theit daily activities and talk to their friends.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
friends about their daily routines. Remind sts that they are using the present simple with the first person. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask one or two sts to report in front of the whole class. - check and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Write a paragraph ( about 80 words) about their daily routines in their workbook.
- Try to use English to talk.
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date of preparing:15/08/2012 UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF...... Period : 4 LESSON 3: LISTENING Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: Students know how hard manual labourer in Vietnam work and appreciate them. II-Languge focus: 1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people. 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
Date of teaching
Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- The past simple tense. - Adverb of frequency. III- Skills: + Listening comprehension. - Students listen and number the pictures in their correct order. - Students listen and decide whether the staments are true or false. IV- Teaching aids: - Tape, board, chalk, textbook. V-- Procedures: Time Teachers activities 5 1. Homework checking:( 5 mins) Two sts tell the whole class about their daily routines 2. Before you listen: Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ 10 introduce the words and phrases used to describe a cyclo drivers daily activities. a. T asks sts to work in groups and make a list of vehicles and the people who operate them, then compare their list with other groups Students activities
- work in groups and recall the vehicles and their operators then make a list on a sheet of paper - compare theirs notes. - listen to the T and open their - Introduce the topic of the listening text: books A day in the life of a cyclo driver and asks sts to open their books. - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Work in pairs to ask and answer. answer the questions in the textbook - Some pairs stand up and report. Have you ever traveled by cyclo? S1: Have you ever traveled by When was it? cyclo? Is it interesting to travel by cyclo? S2: Yes, I have. Which do you prefer, going by S3: When was it? bicycle or by cyclo? Give reasons. S4: Last summer holiday... - Move around to help sts then ask some S5: Is it interesting to travel by pairs to report. cycle? - Give remarks. S6: Yes, it is. S7: Which do you prefer, going by bicycle or by cyclo? S8: I prefer traveling by cyclo because I have time to look around and Im not tired. b. T asks S to look at the words in the book and read after T . - look at the words and read after T - Introduce some new words . - 'passenger (n): (in the pictures) - copy the words and phrases. - 'district (n): e.g.: Ba Dinh district,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
Thanh Mien district - drop (v): when the passenger gets off the cyclo. - 'pedal (v) = cycle (v) - 'purchases (n) = the shopping: The things someone has bought - food stall (n) : (In the picture) - Read the words aloud and asks sts to repeat. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and ordering pictures. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the pictures in the textbook and describe each picture. - Do the first example: In the first picture, a cyclo driver is cycling his cyclo and taking a woman to somewhere.
- listen and repeat. - Some individuals read the words aloud
- look at the pictures and listen to the T. - describe the other pictures in pairs. - listen to the teacher.
- Introduce the situation about Mr. Lam, a cyclo driver in Hochiminh city talking about his daily routines. T asks sts to listen to the tape/ teacher and number the - listen to the tape / the teacher and pictures in the correct order. do the task - play the tape/ read the text twice. - Share their answers. - give feedback. - Ask sts to share their answers in pairs. - check their answers , and then - Get sts answers. correct their work if they have any - play the tape once again, stop where wrong answers. necessary and conduct the correction. Key: 5 6 1 3 2 4 + Task 2: Aims: Practice listening for specific information by deciding if the given statements are true or false. - ask sts to have a look at the statements and read them in pairs and make sure they understand the statements. -Ask sts to listen to the tape/T again and tick the box to indicate if the statements are true or false. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Read the statements , underline the key words in each sentence. - Try to guess whether each sentence is true or false. - Listen and do the task. - Share their answers with their partners. - Give answers.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Checks sts answers. - Play the tape once again, stop where - Listen again and check. necessary and conduct the correction. Key: 1F; 2T; 3F; 4F; 5F. 8 4. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in pairs and use the suggested words to ask and answer about the cyclo driver. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask one or two sts to retell the cyclo drivers routines in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Write a short paragraph about Mr. Lam's routines - Work in pairs to ask and answer questions such as: " What is the man's name?" " What does he do?" .............
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date of preparing:16/08/2012 Period : 5 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching

LESSON 4: WRITING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: -By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a narrative. II-Languge focus: 1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people. 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- The past simple tense. - Adverb of frequency. III. Skills: + Reading: Students read a passage to find the verbs in the past simple and the connectors. + Writing a narrative using the prompts. + Speaking: - Students discuss in groups to share their answers. IV. Teaching aids: - A picture, board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm- up: 5 Aims: To raise students' interest. - Look at the picture. -Show a picture that teacher prepared in advance about the explosion in Twin Towers in 2001. - Ask some questions: S: The buildings are on fire. T: What is happening ? S: It happened in the U.S.A T: Do you know where it happened? S: It happened on September T: When did it happen? 11th , 2001 T: How did it happen? S: Two planes carrying bombs - Tell sts that they are going to write a crashed into two buildings and narrative of past events. killed a lot of people. 20 2. Before you write: - Aims: to provide sts with the materials ( vocabulary, grammar, form) to write. - Look at Task 1. + Task 1: - Read through the passage - Ask sts to look at Task 1 . individually . - Ask them to read through the passage - S: The most frightening in two minutes to get the main idea. experience of the writer's life - Ask one student to report. when he(she) travelled on a - Explain some new words/ phrases in plane on 14th July 1995. the passage: + stare death in the face ( explain the - Listen and repeat: meaning of each word ,then let sts + stare death in the face guess the meaning of the whole phrase) + fasten + 'fasten(v)( demonstrate) + dip + dip (v) : move to a lower level. - Ask sts to listen and read these words again. - Ask them to read the passage again more carefully and do task 1 in 5 minutes. - Read the passage again and do - Move round to make sure that all sts task 1. are working. + Verbs used in the past simple: - Ask them to share their answers with stared, was, arrived, got, took off,
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10
their partners. - Check the task by asking two sts to report. - Give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the passage again and in groups to do task 2. - Divide the class into three regions: one identifies the events, one identifies the climax and the rest identifies the conclusion. - Ask sts to work in only 2 minutes. - Ask three representatives of three groups to report. - Draw the conclusion about writing a narrative. + Form: 3 parts: - introduction. - body: events, climax - conclusion + Verb tense: the past simple tense. + Connectors: at that time, on that day,then, after that, a few minutes later, until, etc. - Ask sts to do task 3 but before that explain some new words: + 'discotheque (n) : disco + choke (v): to be unable to breath - Ask sts to listen and read these words again. 3. While you write: - Aims: students practise cotrolledwriting. + Task 3: - Ask sts to build up a narrative about a hotel fire using the prompts. - Ask them to work individually. - Move round to conduct the activity and to note down sts' mistakes. - Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. 4. After you write: -Aims: to get feedback. - Ask sts to report their work sentence by sentence. - Remind sts that they should use the
began,thought, were told, seemed, realised, were, screamed, thought, had, felt, gained, announced, landed. + Connectors( expressions of time): on that day, at first, then, a few minutes later. - work in groups. - Report the answers: + The events: people got on plane, plane took off, hostesses were just beginning to serve lunch when plane began to shake, plane seemed to dip, people screamed in panic. + The climax: We thought we had only minutes to live. + The conclusion: the pilot that everything was all right, we landed safely, it was the most frightening experience of my life. - Listen and repeat these words.
- Write the passage into their notebooks. Last year I spent my summer holidays at a seaside town. The hotel was modern and comfortable. I had a wonderful holiday until the fire. It was Saturday evening and everyone was sitting in the discotheque on the ground floor. It was crowded with people. They were dancing and singing happily. Suddenly we smelt
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
past simple to write.
smoke. Then black smoke began to fill the room. Everybody started to scream in panic. People ran away toward the fire exits. One door was blocked. Many people began to cough and to choke. Then just as we thought we had only minutes to live, the fire brigade arrived. Firemen fought their way into the room and soon everyone was safely out of the building. Luckily, nobody was seriously hurt. It was the most frightening experience of my life.
5. Homework 1 - Ex 1, 2 (page 9) VI-EXPERIENCES:

LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound / i / from the sound /i:/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the present simple tense and the past simple tense. II-Languge focus:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
1.Vocabulary: - Words concerning daily activities of people. 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense. - The past simple tense. - Adverb of frequency III- Skills: -Practise pronounciation and grammar. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking. Exercise1: 7 - Ask one student to do exercise 1 1. I first went to school when I (page 9) on the board. was six years old. 2. My father held my hand firmly and took me to the school gate. 3. I was frightened by all the strange faces and the large buildings. 4. I quickly found another gate - Check Ex 2 with the whole class. on the other side of the Check this exercise sentence by playground. sentence. ......... Exercise 2: - Give remarks and marks. 1. Last summer 5. so 2. In the morning 6. At first 17 2. Pronunciation: 3. Once in a while 7. in the - Aims: to introduce the two sounds end and to help sts to read these sounds 4. However 8. On the correctly. whole - Introduce two sounds / I / and / i: /. - Read each sound twice and then ask sts to listen and repeat. - Look at the board. - Ask sts to look at the book, then - Listen to the teacher and then listen and repeat. listen and repeat / I / and /i:/ - Ask sts to practise reading these - Listen and repeat. words in groups. /I/ / i:/ - Ask some sts to read aloud and hit kick heat give remarks. repeat - Ask sts to look at part 2 and tell bit click beat sts what they are going to do. read - Do the first example:( read the little interested meat sentence aloud and underline the eaten sounds) 1. Is he coming to the cinema ? /I/ /i:/ /I/ /I/
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
- Ask sts to work in pairs to practise reading and to find the sounds in the rest sentences. 2. We 'll miss the begining of the film. - Remind them of the intonation of 3. Is it an interesting film, Jim? the questions. ( sound //) - move round to help if necessary. 4. The beans and the meat were - Ask some sts to read these quite cheap. sentences aloud. - Give remarks. 5. He's going to leave here for 3. Grammar and vocabulary: the Green Mountains. - Aims: to revise the present simple 6. Would you like to have meat, tense and the past simple tense. peas and cheese? - Ask sts to think about the present ( sound / i:/) simple tense and ask some to tell the whole class about the form and the use of the tense. - Ask sts about the position of + Form: (+) S + V/ Vs/ Ves adverbs of frequency. +....... (- ) S + don't/ doesn't + - Ask sts to do Ex 1 individually in V +...... 5 minutes, then share their answers (?) Do/ Does + S + V with their partners. +..........? - Explain any new words if necessary. + Use: to talk about present - Ask some sts to report and give habits or present states. remarks. + Position: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 orally in pairs - after " to be" but before other in 2 minutes. verbs. - Move round to conduct the - " As a rule" is placed at the activity. beginning of a sentence. - Ask 2 sts to report. 1. is 7. catch 2. fish 8. go - Present the past simple tense. 3. worry 9. give up - Ask some students to tell the 4. are 10. say whole class about the form and the 5. catch 11. realise use of this tense. 6. am 12. am Sample answers: - Ask sts to look at Ex 3 and He always get up early. explain what sts are going to do. She is sometimes late for school. - Ask sts to do this exercise in 5 Lan normally practises minutes , then share their answers speaking English. with their partners. As a rule, Thao is a hard- Ask them to pay attention to the working student.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
past form of irregular verbs and some verbs are put in passive voice. - Ask 2 sts to do this exercise on the board. - Move round to help sts if necessary. - Check and give remarks.
4. Homework -Ex 1, 2 ( page 6)
+ Form: (+ ) S + V-ed/ V( irregular) +........ ( - ) S + didn't + V +.......... ( ? ) Did + S + V + .............? + Use: to indicate that somthing happen in the past. 1. was done 7. began 13. was 2. cooked 8. felt 14. leapt 3. were 9 put out 15. hurried 4. smelt 10. crep 16. found 5. told 11. slept 17. wound 6. sang 12. woke 18. flowed
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date of preparing:17/08/2012 Period: 7 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching
UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS

LESSON 1 : READING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know more about school and related problems. II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form. 2. Grammar: - Wh- questions.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- V-ing and To-infinitive. III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: to fill in the blanks and to answer the questions IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 5 1. Warm-up: - Aims: to raise sts' interest and to introduce the topic. -Ask students to work in pairs and discuss this question: "When you meet your friends, which of the following topics do you often talk about?" - Ask sts to look at the cues in the textbook. - Encourage them to think of other topics. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes then ask some pairs to report. - Check and give remarks. - Introduce the topic of this lesson. 2. Before you read: - Aims: to introduce vocabulary and the grammatical item relating to the reading text. a. Vocabulary pre-teach: - Provide the students with these new words/phrases in this way: + Read and write each word/phrase on the blackboard then give the meaning of the word/phrase + corner shop(NP): a shop at the corner of a street + pro'fession(n): = job, occupation . + stuck(adj): b tc, b kt + 'attitude(n): what you think about or behave toward something. + mall (n): an area containing a lot of shops . eg: a shopping mall - Ask sts to listen and repeat, then practise with their partners.
- Work in pairs orally. - some sts report. S1: When I meet my friends, I often talk about films, our study, and other students. S2: I often talk about my favourite singers, some film stars, or my hobbies. S3: I usually talk sports and games .
10
- Copy down - Listen to the teacher then repeat. - Practise reading these words with their partners.
- Some sts read these words aloud.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
- Ask some sts read all the word/phrases aloud, listen and help the students to read the words/phrases correctly. b. Gerund and to- infinitive introduction: -Recall the usages of gerund and toinfinitive to the students. - Ask sts to tell the teacher the cases to use gerund and to-infinitive. - Ask sts to discuss quickly in 1 minute, then one of them stand up to report. - Listen and give remarks. 3. While you read: - Aims: sts practise reading and then do the tasks relating to the text. - Introduce briefly the content of the reading text. "You are going to read three talks given by a student, a teacher and a students father about school. You read them and do the tasks assigned." - Ask sts to read through three talks and tell teacher the main ideas of these talks. Task 1: Gap-filling. - Ask the students to read again these talks, then work independently and fill each blank with one of the words in the box. There are more words than the blanks. - Have sts compare the answer with a partner. - Get feedback and give correct answers. Task 2: Finding who... - Ask students to work in pairs. Read the small talks again and find out who..... - Move round to check sts'work. - Ask sts to share their answers with
like love + V- ing V enjoy
hope want decide
+ to-
- Listen to the teacher.
- Read through the talks, then discuss their contents. - Read the text again and do the task. - Share their ideas with their partners. - Some sts read their answers aloud. 1. enjoy 4. crowded 2. traffic 3. worry 5. language
- Work in pairs to discuss. - Share their ideas with other pairs'. - Some pairs stand up and report. - S1: enjoys teaching S2: Miss phuong - S3: has to get up early S4: Phong - S5: lives far from school S6: Phong - S7: loves working with children - S8: Miss Phuong
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
other pairs'. - 9-10 pairs are required to give answers in front of the class(1 pair/ 1 time/ 1 answer). - Listen and check. Task 3: Answering questions. - Ask students to keep on working in pairs. Read the talks more carefully and answer the questions. - Move round to check the activity. - Ask some pairs to report in front of the class. - Get feedback and give correct answers. 4. After you read: - Aims; to give sts a chance to talk about themselves. - Tell students to work in groups: Choose one of the following topics and talk about it for about 5 minutes. a.What subjects you like learning best and why. b. What you like and dislike doing at school . c. What you worry about at school . - Go round to help students with their work. - Ask some sts to talk about their topic in front of the class. - check and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Part A ( page 10- workbook)
........................... - Discuss in pairs. - Some pairs report . P1: He studies at Chu Van An high school P2: He studies many subjects such as Math, Physics, Chemistry..... P3: Because it is an international language. P4: She says that teaching is hard work, but she enjoys it because she loves working with children. P5: Because his son has to ride his bike in narrow and crowded streets on the way to school - Discuss in groups of three or four one of three topics. - Assign one member of each group to be the secretary to take notes their group's ideas. - Some sts stand up to present their ideas.
VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:20/08/2012

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

LESSON 2 : SPEAKING Students absence Notes
Period : 8 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching
I.Objectives: - Sts can make small talks in daily situations II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form. 2. Grammar: - Wh- questions. - V-ing and To-infinitive. III. Skills: - Speaking: - Asking and answering in small talks.. - Starting and closing a conversations. - Reading: - Reading the sentences and then rearranging them into a conversation IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time 5 Teachers activities 1-Warm - up: - Aims: to focus sts on the topic of the lesson and to raise their interest. - Introduce the situation and write a short dialogue on board: "Suppose that you meet a friend at the supermarket. You are very busy .What will you say to open and end the conversation." A: ............................... ( 1) B: Hi Lan. How are you? A: Im fine. Thank you. And you? B: Im very well. Thanks. I havent seen you for a long time. Lets go somewhere for a drink A: Sorry, ..................... ( 2) - Ask sts to complete the dialogue in pairs. - Ask some pairs to report. Students activities
- Look at the board and listen.
- Work in pairs to ask and answer. - Some pairs stand up to report. (1) Hello, Mai/ Hi Mai (2) Im very busy now . I really must go now, Perhaps another time.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
12
"Today we will practice speaking conversation having starting and closing sentences." 2.Before you speak: Aims: Introduce phrases used to start or to close a conversation. + Task 1: - Ask sts to look at the phrases in the book and to work in pairs to put the expressions in starting and closing a conversation - Make sure that sts understand all the expressions = + Hows everything at school?= How 's your studying? + Catch you later = See you later. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Ask two sts to give answers. - Get feedback and give remarks. - Ask sts to read all the expressions aloud in chorus.
- Work in pairs to put the phrases into the correct columns. - Ask two sts to give feedback. Starting a conversation Closing a conversation Good morning Goodbye. See you later Hows everything? Well, its been nice talking to you. Hello. How are you? Sorry. Ive got to go. Talk to you later. Hi. How is school? Great. Ill see you tomorrow.
12
3. While you speak: Aims: Sts can practise making a conversation using the suggested words. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read through all the sentences and rearrange them into an appropriate conversation. - Ask sts to do the task individually and then discuss with their partners. - Go around to help sts - Get feedback and give correct answers. - Ask sts practise reading this dialogue in pairs. - Ask some pairs to read aloud.
Hello. What are you doing? Catch up with you later.
- Read and rearrange the sentences into a conversation. - Share their ideas with their partners. Answers : D - F - B - H - E - C G - A. - Practise reading in pairs. - Some pairs stand up to read the dialogue aloud. - Read all the words and phrases as well as the dialogue.
+ Task 3: - Ask sts to read all the given expressions and the incomplete - Work individually ,then work in dialogue. pairs.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to complete the conversation with suitable words, phrases or sentences in the box. - Ask sts to work individually first and then work in pairs - Get feedback and give correct answers. - Ask some pairs to practise in front of the class. - Listen and help sts if necessary. 15 4- After you speak: Aims: Sts can make small talk on suggested topics. + Task 4: - Introduce the topics: The weather Last nights TV programmes Football Plans for the next weekend - Divide the class in to four groups. Each group gets one topic and use the starting and ending of a conversation to practise. - Ask sts to work in pairs to make small talks about the topic they are assigned. - Go round to help sts. - Call on some pairs to act out the dialogues in front of the class. - Ask others sts to comment on their conversations. - Get feedback and correct any mistakes if there are
- Some pairs read the dialogue aloud. A: ..................... Whats the matter with you? B: ....... I feel tired .Ive got a headache A: .................. Youd better go home and have a rest - Listen to the teacher and try to brainstorm about the topics.
- Listen to the teacher. - Work in pairs to make small talks. - Some of sts act out in front of the class. 1. The weather: A: Hi, Lan. How was your trip to Vung Tau? B: Hi Hung. It was wonderful|. I really enjoyed it. A: What did you like most in Vung Tau? B: The weather. A: What was the weather like in Vung Tau? B: It was warm. I prefer the weather in Vung Tau to Nha Trang. A: Oh, really? I love it, too. B: By the way, do you want to see my photos? : Sure ...
5- Homework: - Write down what they have 1 discussed. VI-EXPERIENCES:

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

LESSON 3 : LISTENING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Sts are able to make mini conversations about daily topics such as study at school, wheather and travelling.... II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form. 2. Grammar: - Wh- questions. - V-ing and To-infinitive. III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills: - Listening and numbering the pictures in the correct order. - Listening and answering given questions - Listening and filling in the gaps. - Speaking : describe the pictures and talk about their problems at school. IV. Teaching aids: - textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1 Homework checking: 5 Two pairs of sts make small talks about their daily life 2. Before you listen: 10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and sentence models used in small talks. - Ask sts to read the questions and answers in the book and work in pairs -Work in pairs and do the to match the question with the matching. appropriate answer, and then compare 1-c; 2-e; 3-a; 4-b; 5-d. their list with other pairs. - Work in pairs to ask and - Check sts work answer: - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Some pairs stand up and
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
answer. - Move around to help sts. - Ask some pairs to present and gives remarks - Introduce some new words/ phrases + semester (n): e.g.: Semester 1: 5 Sept -> Jan. Semester2: January -> May + enjoy oneself (n): somebody does something and likes it. + go for a swim (v): e.g.: go for a walk/ a drive - Read the words sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: - Aims: Sts practise listening and numbering pictures, listenning for specific information by answering questions and by filling in the blanks with missing words. + Task 1: - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the pictures in the textbook and use the following suggestions to ask and answer about each picture. What/ who/ see? Who/ they? Where/ they? What / think / talk about? - Give one example: T: What can you see in picture a? T: Who do you see? T: What do you think they are talking about? - Ask sts to do the same. - Move around to help sts. - Introduce that sts will listen to four short conversations and ask sts to look at the pictures and listen to the T. - Play the tape/ read the conversations once. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answers.
present. S1:What subjects are you taking this semester? S2: Im taking maths. S1: How do you like the class? S2: I really like it ......................... - Copy the words and phrases.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud
- Look at the pictures and listen to the T.
S: A hotel S: Two people S: Maybe they are talking about the hotel or the holiday. - Ask and answer about the pictures in pairs. - Listen to the teacher. - Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task - Compare their answers and then correct their work if they have
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape after each conversation and conduct the correction. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the statements and know what information they need to answer the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/T twice and take short notes to answer the questions. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Ask some sts to report the answers. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 3: - Ask sts to read the conversation in pairs and see what information they need to fill in the gaps. They may guess the answers in some gaps. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/T once and fill in the gaps. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Ask some sts to report their answers. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 4. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in groups and talk about the problems they have experienced at school (difficulties in learning, having bad marks, being late for school, disobeying the regulations ...) Sts may use the following suggested questions to ask and answer. +What problems have you experienced at school? + What are the reasons? + What have you done to solve them? - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working
wrong answers. - Report their answers. Key: b c d a - Work in pairs to read the questions. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes. - Report their answers. 1. (She is taking) English; 2. (She is) in Miss Lan Phuongs Class; 3. (He is) at a party; 4. (He plans to stay there) for a week. 5. No, she doesnt. She travels alone. - Work in pairs to read the conversation and try to fill in the gaps before they listen. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their answer in pairs. - Report the answers. 1: it here 5: travelling 2: very nice 6: No 3: big 7: alone 4: comfortable 8: for a drink - Listen to the teacher.
-Ask and answer in groups. - One/ two pairs present.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
effectively. - Ask one or two pair to retell theirs problems in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks 2 5. Homework Write a short paragraph about their problems at school . VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date of preparing:30/08/2012 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS Period : 10 LESSON 4 : WRITING Date of Students absence Class teaching 10 10 10
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know how to fill in an English form. II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: - Words to ask for personal information in a form.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Wh- questions. - V-ing and To-infinitive. III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills: - Speaking: discuss in pairs. - Writing: fill in a form. IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking 5 - Ask one st to tell the whole class - Listen to their friend attentively. about his or her problems at school in front of the whole class. - Check and give marks. 2. Before you write: 20 - Aims: To introduce the topic of this lesson, and to guide sts to fill in a - Open their books and look at the form. tasks. - Introduce the topic of this lesson:" Filling in a form" and ask sts to look at the textbook. + Task 1: - Ask sts to work in pairs to discuss - Pair 1: two questions in 2 minutes. 1. When you want to send some 1. On what occasions do you have to money/ parcels at a post office. fill in a form? 2. Your surname, your first name, 2. What sort of information do you your age. often have to provide when you fill in - Pair 2: a form? 1. When you apply for a job or - Move round to help sts if necessary. attend an examination to a high - Ask some pairs to stand up to report school/ a university. their ideas. 2. Your address, your job, your date - Add some more ideas. of birth.... - Give remarks. + Task 2: - Look at task 2 and listen to the - Ask sts to look at the introduction in teacher. task 2 and explain more clearly. - Ask them to look through column A - Read through the task . and column B. - Explain the phrase: "'marital - Write this phrase in their 'status"= Are you married or single? notebooks. - Ask sts to listen and repeat this phrase. - listen and repeat. - Ask sts to match a line in A with a question in B individually 2 minutes. - Do the task individually. - Ask them to share their answers with - discuss in pairs.
2. Grammar:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10
their partners after completing the task. - Get feedback and check. - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer about the questions in column B. - Ask them to give short answers. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to report. - Give remarks. + Task 3: - Tell sts that forms ask them to do certain things so they should follow the requirements. - Ask sts to read through five points , then explain some new words: - de'lete( v) : to omit something. - 'applicable (adj): suitable. - Ask sts to listen and read these words again. - Ask sts to read the task again and fill in the blanks as they are required. - Ask them to work individually in 2 minutes and then compare their answers with their partners. - Move round to check the activity. - Ask 2 two sts to write their answers on the board. - Check and give remarks. - Ask sts to look at Task 4 and read through this task. - Explain some new words: - en'rol (v): to become a member/ a student in a course. en'rolment( n) - natio'nality( n): eg: Vietnamese, French, etc - 'specify (v): tell clearly. - Ask sts to listen and read these words again. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practse filling in a form. - Ask sts to read the form again and fill in it. - Ask them to work individually in 8
- Give feedback. 1- d; 2 - f; 3 - e; 4 - g; 5 - b; 6 - c; 7 - a. S1: What do you do? S2: I'm a student. S3: Where are you living at the moment? S4: At 32 Tran Hung Dao Street. S5: Are you married or single? S6: Single. S7: What 's your first name? S8: Binh. ......... - Listen to the teacher. - write these words into their notebooks.
- Read thes e words again. - Do the task silently and the share their answers with their partners. 1. NGUYEN THI NHUNG. 2. Nhung 3. I am a student. (Delete other choices) 4. 5. - Write these words in their notebooks.
- Listen and repeat. - Fill in the form.

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
minutes . - Copy the form on the board. - Go round the classroom to make sure that all sts are writing and they know how to do. - Ask them to share their answers with their partners. 4. After you write: - Aims: to get feedback. - Ask one st to fill in the form on the board. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Check and correct any mistakes. - Ask sts to read their forms again and correct the mistakes if there are. 5. Homework: - Part D ( page 27- textbook)
- Discuss in pairs . + Sample : Mr/ Mrs/ miss Surname: PHAM First name: VAN TUNG Date of birth: FEBRUARY 20th, 1991. Nationality: VIETNAMESE. ........................... - Self- correct.
VI-EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound / / from the sound /a:/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise Wh-questions and V-ing and to infinitive.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: 2. Grammar:
- Words to ask for personal information in a form. - Wh- questions. - V-ing and To-infinitive. III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills: + Speaking: - work in pairs to ask and answer Wh- questions. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. -Read the passages and sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm-up: 3 - Aims: to introduce the topic and to raise sts' interest. - Write on the boards two sentences: - Look at the board. eg: My cousin is my uncle's son. I want to read this example. - Ask one st to read the examples - One st read the sentences aloud. aloud. - Check whether they pronounce - Listen to the teacher and repeat. correctly, then ask the whole class to read the sentences again. - Point at underlined words and introduce the topic;" Today we will practise pronouncing two sounds / / and /a:/. 2. Pronunciation: 10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds // - Write down two sounds. and /a:/ and help sts to practise these - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and repeat. study far pronounce them clearly twice, then subject father ask sts to repeat. cousin marvellous - Tell sts the difference between two ................. sounds. - Read these words in pairs and - Ask them to look at the textbook, check for their partners. listen and repeat. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read - Look at the book and work in the words again so that they can check pairs.for each other. Answers: - Move around to help . / / /a:/ - Ask two sts to read again and give
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
30
remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 29 in the book. - Ask the to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound // and the words containing sound /a:/. - Ask them to work in 4 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. 3. Grammar and vocabulary: - Aims: to revise Wh- questions and the use of gerund and To- infinitive as well as give sts a chance to practise these grammar issues by doing some exercises. a. Wh- questions: - T: What are Wh- questions? - Ask sts to give examples. - Ask some sts to say aloud.
love much cousin Charles month lunch
dancing stars Martha, dark garden
- S: They are questions beginning with " what, who, where, how,etc". - S1: What 's his job? - S2: How do you go to school? - S3: Who teach you maths? ................ - Look at the textbook. - make questions then ask and answer with their partners.
S1: When did you come? S2: Just a few days ago. S3: How long did you stay in - Ask sts to look at Ex 1 in page 29, then make questions for the answers. Quang Ninh? - Ask them to work individually , then S4: For a few days. S5: Who did you come with? work in pairs to ask and answer. - Let them work in 4 minutes and then S6: I came with a friend. ............ ask some pairs to report. - Check and give remarks. V-ing: - After some verbs: admit, avoid,admit,give up, like, love, enjoy, finish, keep, mind, postpone, practise, suggest, b. V-ing and To infinitive: - Ask some sts to tell the whole class consider, etc. - Go + V-ing: go camping the cases to use V-ing: go dancing, go shopping, go swimming, etc. - After prepositions. To infinitive: - after some verbs: afford, arrange, choose, manage, refuse,
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask them about the cases to use to infinitive. - Check and add any information if necessary. - Ask sts to read the letter in Ex 2 and then give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. - Ask them to work alone in 5 minutes and then check it with their partners. - Ask two sts to write the answers on the board. - Check and give remarks.
promise, want, need, hope, agree, plan, decide, etc. - V + O + to infinitive: want, advise, tell, request, order, etc. EX 2: 1. to hear 2. going 3. remembering 4. doing 5. worrying EX 3: 1. to go 2. waiting 3. having 4. to find 5. living 6. to pay 7. to go 8. visiting 9. seeing 10. hearing.
- Ask sts to do Ex 3 in 3 minutes . - Ask 2 sts to do this exercise on the board. - Tell sts to work individually , then share their answers with their parters. - Ask one st to give remarks on their friends ' task. 2 - Check and give remarks. 4. Homework: - Part B ( page 11- workbook) VI-EXPERIENCES:
6. making 7. to call 8. to lend 9. talking 10. to post.
Date of preparing:04/09/2012
UNIT 3: PEOPLES BACKGROUND

Period : 12+13 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10 I. Objectives:
LESSON 1 : READING Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Students know more about famous scientists especially about Marie Curie, and admire her. II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying. 2. Grammar: - The past perfect tense. - Past perfect vs Past simple III. Skills: - Reading: read the text and do Matching and True or False exercise and answer the questions. - Speaking: discuss in pairs and in groups. IV. Teaching Aids: textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: Network... 5 + Aims: to raise sts' interest in the reading text. - Work in groups - Ask students to work in groups of 3-4 students . - Some Students report orally. - Ask the students to give a list of famous scientists and their inventions. - Move round to check the activity. - Ask them to work in 4 minutes and then get feedback. The group which has the longest list will be the winner 2. Before you read: 12 - Aims; to introduce the content of the - Discuss in pairs and then text and provide sts with some new answer the questions. words. - Some sts stand up to answer. - Students are required to work in pairs to answer the following questions: + Have you ever heard of Marie Curie? - Listen to the teacher and Copy + What do you know about her? down - give the correct information. - Read and write new words on the board. + background (n): lai lch + ease (v): lm du + mature (adj): full-grown + interrupt (v): t qung + humanitarian (adj): Nhn o humane (adj): Nhn c - Repeat the words. - Work in pairs to check for each + tragic(adj): bi thng + ambitious(adj): tham vng other.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
25
+ atomic(adj): thuc v nguyn t - Read each word 3 times and ask the sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the words aloud in front of the class - Listen and help the sts to read the words correctly. 3. While you read: - Aims: Sts practise reading and do the tasks + Task 1: Matching. - Ask the students to read the passage independently and match the words or phrases in A with their meaning in B. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in the context of the reading. - Ask them to compare the answers with their friends. - Call on some sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. - Give feedback and correct answers: + Task 2: True or False. - Ask the sts to read the passage more carefully and decide whether the statements are true(T) or false(F). Correct the false information. - Ask the sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that helps the students to find the correct answers. - Move round to help sts if necessary, then ask them to share their answers with their partners. - Ask some sts to give answers. - Listen and help the students to do the exercise correctly + Task 3: Answering questions. - Ask students to work in pairs to answer the questions.
- 1 student/ 1 time
- Work individually.
- Discuss in pairs to share their ideas. -Listen and self-correct the exercise. - Copy down * Key: 1.c 2. e 3. a 4. d 5. b - listen to the teacher. - Students do the work individually. - Discuss the answers with their partners. - some sts do orally while others watch + Key: 1. T 2. F( Her dream was to become a scientist) 3. T 4. F (She married Pierre Curie in 1895) 5. T - Self-correct the work - Work in pairs orally - Share their ideas. - 9-10 pairs work orally in front of the class. Key:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Tell the students to compare their answers with other pairs. Let them discuss and correct for one another. - Call some pairs of students to read aloud the questions and answers in front of the class. - Feedback and give correct answers.
1.Marie Curie was born in Warsaw on November 7,1867 2.She was a brilliant and mature students . 3. She work as a tutor to save money for a study tour abroad. 4.She was awarded a Nobel Prize in Chemistry for determining the atomic weight of radium. 5. No it wasnt. her real joy was easing human suffering
3 4. After you read: - Aims: to check sts' understanding and to summarize the text. * For advanced students doing at home. 1 5. Homework: - Ask students to write a passage of about 60 words about a famous scientist. VI-EXPERIENCES:

Period : 14 Class 10 10 10
Date of teaching
LESSON 2 : SPEAKING Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I.Objectives: - Sts know how to interview a person and talk about a person's background. II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying. 2. Grammar: - The past perfect tense. - Past perfect vs Past simple III. Skills: - Speaking: - Asking about another person's background. - Talking about a person's background basing on what they have interviewed IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time 10 Teachers activities 2.Before you speak Aims: to guide sts how to do and to provide them with needed vocabulary and grammar. + Task 1: - Ask sts to think about people's background, and then read the cues in this task. - Ask them to discuss in pairs to choose which items to tell about someone's background. - Get feedback and give the correct answers. - Ask sts to continue working in pairs to discuss what questions they can ask when they want to know about these things. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to give answers. Students activities
- Think about people's background. - Work in pairs to choose the correct items. + family + education + experience - Work in pairs to discuss the questions. - Some pairs stand up to give answers. Family: - How many people are there in your family? - What does your father/ mother do? Education: - Where did you study at primary school/ junior secondary school? - What subject do you like best? - What degree do you have? - Write the questions on the board Experience: and give remarks. - How long have you been a member of our school's speaking club? - Have you ever won any prizes? 3. While you speak:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
Aims: Sts can practise making an interwiew and then talking about the person they have interwiewed. + Task 2: - Ask sts to imagine they are journalists and ask them to work in pairs to interview their partners about his/her background or that of a person he/ she knows well. - Ask them to follow the stages in the textbook. - Go around to suggest the questions if necessary. - Ask one pair to report. - Give remarks so that other pairs can correct their mistakes.
+ Task 3: - Ask sts to work in small groups to talk about the person they have learnt about from the interview. - Ask them to work in 7 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4- After you speak: Aims: Sts present what they have discussed in the previous stage. - Ask two sts to tell the whole class about the people they interviewed about. - Listen to them attentively and correct the mistakes. - Give remarks on the whole activity.
- Work in pairs to ask and answer. - One pair stand up and report: S1: Hello. Can you tell me something about yorself? S2: Oh, of course. What do you want to know? S1: When and where were you born? S2: I was born on September 11th, 1991 in Hai Duong. S1: How many people are there in your family? S2: There are four: my parents, my sister and I. S1: What do your parents do? S2: my dad is a doctor and my mum is a nurse. ............................... - Discuss in groups using the information they have got from the interview. - Sample answer: " Quan's cousin, Minh, was born on November 2nd, 1985 in Hai Duong City. He is the only child in his family. His father is an engineer and his mother is a teacher. As a brilliant student, he always got good marks when he was a student at To Hieu Primary School and then at Le Quy Don Secondary School. When he was fifteen , he passed the exam to Nguyen Trai High School. He said he liked all subjects at school but among them he liked English best. He has attended the English Speaking Contest twice and won the fisrt prize in 2003. At the moment he is studying at a university in Australia
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
5- Homework: and he is very successful..." - Write about the people they have interviewed about. VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:05/09/2011 Period : 15 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Sts know about the background of a famous person II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying. 2. Grammar: - The past perfect tense. - Past perfect vs Past simple III. Skills: Sts develop the following skills: - Listening and marking True/False - Listening and filling in gaps - Asking and answering about sbs background. IV. Teaching aids: - Handouts V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Two sts tell the whole class about two - Two sts stand in front of the people's background. class to speak. - Listen and give remarks and marks. 2. Before you listen: 10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used to describe the background of a sports star.

Date of teaching
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ Ask sts to work in groups and make a list of sports and the names of the sports competitions, then compare their list with other groups
20
- Work in groups and recall the names of sports and the names of the sports competitions then make a list on a sheet of paper - Compare theirs notes. - Listen to the T and open the - Introduce the topic of the listening book text: A conversation between a reporter and an Olympic Champion and ask sts - Work in pairs. to open their books. - Some pairs stand up and T asks sts to work in pairs to ask and report. answer the questions in the textbook S1: Can you name any Olympic Can you name any Olympic champions? champions? S2: Tran Hieu Ngan, Sergey What would you like to know about Bubka these people? S3: What would you like to - Move around to help sts. know about these people? - Ask some pairs to present and gives S4: Date and place of birth, remarks study, family, achievements, - Ask sts to work in pairs and recall the hobbies forms of question used to get the - Note down the forms of information. questions: - Ask some sts to speak aloud. When/where were you born? Where did you get a general education? + Ask sts to look at the words in the What achievement have you book and read after T / the tape. got? - Introduce some new words What do you like doing in your - Olympic champion (n): (in the free time? picture) - Look at the words and read - di'ploma (n): sb receive this when after T /the tape. he finishes a course /graduates from college or university. - Copy the words and phrases. - ro'mantic (adj): Romeo and Juliet is a romantic play. - Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Listen and repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Read the words in pairs and 3. While you listen: correct each others mistakes. + Task 1: - Some individuals read the Aims: Practice listening for specific words aloud. information by deciding whether the given statements are true or false. - Introduce the conversation between a reporter and an Olympic champion then ask sts to listen to the conversation and
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
tick on the box to indicate True or False statements. - Ask sts to have a look at the statements and read them in pairs and make sure they understand the statements. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/T and tick the box to indicate if the statements are true or false. - Read/ play the tape twice. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answers. - Read/play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: - Aims: sts listen for specific information to fill in the blanks. - Ask sts to listen to the conversation again and fill in the gaps with the suitable words/ phrases. - Read the conversation twice. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answers. - Read/play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction.
- Work in pairs to read the statements. - Listen and do the task. - discuss their answers in pairs. - Gives their answers: 1T; 2T; 3F; 4T; 5F. - Say their answers aloud, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
4. After you listen: - Aims: to check sts'comprehension in the previous stage. - Ask sts to work in pairs and use the information in Task 1 and 2 to ask and answer about the Olympic champion. - Ask and answer in pairs. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Check and give remarks. - One/ two sts present. - T can ask sts to ask and answer about the sports star(s) they like 5. Homework: - Write a short paragraph about the Olympic champion .
- Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task - compare their answers. - Give their answers. 1. a general education 4. love stories 2. lives; family 5. teacher's diploma 3. different; swimming - Check their answers, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
VI-EXPERIENCES:

LESSON 4 : WRITING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students can write a simple C. V( curriculum vitae) - They can write about a person's background basing on a C. V II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying. 2. Grammar: - The past perfect tense. - Past perfect vs Past simple III. Skills: - Reading: read a model curriculum vitae. - Speaking: discuss in pairs. - Writing: fill in a curriculum, write about a person's background. IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Aks one st to talk about Sally in - One st speaks. front of the whole class. - Others listen to their friend. - Give remarks and a mark. - Give remarks. 2. Before you write: 20 - Aims: to focus sts on the topic and to introduce the structure of a simple C.V, to guide sts to fill in the C.V. + Task 1: - Ask sts to look at the C.V in the - look at the C.V. textbook and introduce some new words: - Copy these words into their
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ C.V( curriculum vitae) : a form with details about somebody's past education and jobs. + tourist guide (n): a person who goes with tourists to point out interesting sights on a journey. + hotel telephonist (n): a person who answers the phone in a hotel. + travel agency ( n) : a business of organising travelling for people. - Read these words aloud and ask sts to listen and repeat. - Ask some sts to read again and check. - Ask sts to read the model C.V in the textbook about Mr. Brown and then answer the questions: T: What is his full name? T: When and where was he born? T: What school did he attend? T: What exams did he pass? T: What did he do before? - Ask sts another question: " What kind of information do you find in the C.V?" - Ask sts to discuss this question in pairs then ask one st to answer. - Give remarks. - Introduce the elements of a C.V: +Personal information: name, sex, date of birth, place of birth. + Education : name of a high school/ a university... + Previous jobs: teacher/ tourist guide/ etc. ( time) + Interest: dancing/ swimming/ etc. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the incomplete form in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs in 5 minutes to ask and answer about
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
notebooks.
- Listen to the teacher and read these words again. - Read the C.V in the textbook and answer T's questions. S1: His full name is David Brown. S2: He was born on November 12th, 1969 in Boston. S3: He attended Kensington High School. S4; He passed exams in English, French and Mathematics. S5: He was a tourist guide and a hotel telephonist. - Discuss the question in pairs then one of them will answer. S: We can find some information such as his name, his date of birth and his place of birth, his education and his previous jobs, etc. - Copy this part into their notebooks.
- Read the form . - Work in pairs to ask and answer. - Complete the form with suitable information.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10
their partner's father/ mother then complete the form with suitable information. - Move round to conduct the activity and to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to read aloud the information they have collected and ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing about a person's background using the information in a C.V and the cues in the textbook. - Ask sts to look at Task 1 again. - Ask them to work independently and write a paragraph about Mr. Brown ,using the suggested words and phrases. - Ask sts to use the past simple to write. - Move around to help if necessary. - Ask sts to write in about 9 minutes, then compare their paragraph with their partners'. 4. After you write: - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer.
- Some sts stand up and read aloud, other sts listen and give remarks.
- Read Mr. Brown's C.V again. - Use the suggested words/ phrases to write a paragraph about Mr. Brown. - Share their paragraph with their friends'. - Some sts stand up and read their work aloud. - Other sts give remarks. " Mr. Brown was born on November 12th, 1969 in Boston. He went to Kensington High School and passed examed in English, French and Mathematics. He worked as a tourist guide in a travel agency from June 1991 to December 1998. And from 1999 to 2002 , he worked as a hotel telephonist. He likes music and dancing."
5. Homework: - Because time is not allowed, the writing activity in Task 3 will be assigned as homework.
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

Period : 17 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound / e / from the sound / / and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the past perfect and distinguish it from the past simple. II. Language focus 1. Vocabulary: Words to describe peoples background and studying. 2. Grammar: - The past perfect tense. - Past perfect vs Past simple III. Skills: + Pronounciation: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. - Read words and sentences aloud. +Grammar- Read the passages and sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to read aloud the paragraph - One st read his/ her paragraph that he/she wrote about his/ her aloud. partner's parent. - Listen to him/her. - Listen to their friends. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation: 10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds /e/ and // and help sts to practise these sounds. - Write down two sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and sts to repeat. repeat. - Tell sts the difference between two - Look at the book , listen and sounds. repeat.
LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Date of teaching Students absence Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 39 in the book. - Ask the to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /e/ and the words containing sound / /. - Ask them to work in 4 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: - Aims: To revise the past perfect tense and the past simple tense as well as to give them some exercises to do. - Write an example on the board. "When I arrived at the cinema,the film had started" - Ask sts to look at the example and identify the verb in the past perfect. - Ask sts to recall the form of the past perfect tense and to tell the whole class. - Revise the use of the past perfect by giving some examples. Eg1: When the police came , the robbers had escaped. The train had left when Mary arrived at the station. - Tell sts about the chronological order between the past perfect and the past simple.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
man sad mat ................. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /e/ / / red fat pen man sent handbag Helen apples said pans ................
men said met
27
- Look at the example . - One st stands up and answers: " had started" - Form: (+ ) S + had + PII ............ ( - ) S + had + not + PII ......... ( ? ) Had + S + PII ..........? - Uses: + The past perfect refers to a past activity or situation that took place before another past activity or situation. - Copy the examples and listen to the teacher. + The past perfect can be used as the past form of the present perfect. - Copy the examples. - Listen and repeat.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Eg 2: I was nervous because I had never spoken before an audience.( I spoke before an audience yesterday) The house was dirty. We hadn't cleaned it for weeks. - Ask sts to read these examples again. + EX1: - Ask sts to read Ex 1 in page 39, then do the task. - Ask them to work individually to put the verbs into the past perfect, then compare their answers with their partners. - Let them work in 5 minutes and then ask some sts to report. - Check and give remarks.
- Read through all sentences in this exercise. - Do the exercise and then share their answers with their partners. EX 1: 1. had broken 6. had been 2. had done 7. had left 3. had met 8. had moned 4. hadn't turned on 9. hadn't seen 5. had ever seen 10.had broken in. - Read the sentences carefully and do the exercise individually. - Share their answers with their partners. EX 2: 1. had just finished..... came. 2. had seldom travelled ....... went. 3. went...... had already taken. 4. Did you manage........ had he gone. 5. had just got.... phoned...... had been.
+ EX2: - Ask sts to read the sentences in Ex 2 and then give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. - Ask sts to pay attention to the difference between the past perfect and the past simple. - Ask them to work alone in 3 minutes and then check it with their partners. - Ask some sts to read the answers aloud. - Check and give remarks. 3 4. Homework: - Because time is not allowed, Ex3 is assigned as homework. - Part B ( page 19,20- workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date of preparing:25/08/2011 Period: 18
TEST YOURSELF A
Students absence Notes
Class 10 10 10
Date of teaching
I. Objectives: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 1. unit 2 and unit 3. II. Language focus: - General knowledge in unit 1, unit 2 and unit 3. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. III. Skills: listening, speaking and writing. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the textbook Sentence on the board. Mistake - Ask one st to give remarks. Correction - Give remarks and marks. 2. The new lesson: 1 39 - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part had climbed IV at home in advance to save time. climbed - Give sts the time duration for each 3 part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 had turned minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. turned - Ask sts to do listening in class. 10 2.1. Listening: 5 - Ask sts to read the table in the had called textbook. called - Introduce new words: 7 + 'minister (n): priest, vicar. had heard + black freedom movement (n): phong heard tro gii phng ngi da en. 9 went + me'morial (n): an institute built to remind people of a person or an event. had already gone - Read the text twice and ask sts to try - Look at the textbook and try to understand the information in the to complete the table in the second table. time. - Ask sts to share their ideas with their - Copy these words into their notebooks. partners.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10
10
- Read the text again so that sts can check their task for the last time. - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board. - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Check and give feedback. 2.2. Reading: - Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. - Ask one st to report his/ her answers aloud. - listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board. - Ask two other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 2.4. Writing: - Ask some sts to to read their letters aloud. - Ask some sts to give ramarks. - Listen and give remarks on: + form + grammar and vocabulary + ideas + style 3. Homework: - Part D ( Page 22- workbook)
- Listen and read after the teacher. - Listen carefully and do the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers. 1. 15th January 1929 6. a minister at a 2. In 1951 7. the black freedom movement 3. for 4 years 8. heard his speech at the 4. he met 9. In 1986 5. they got married 10. 4th April 1968 - work in groups to share their ideas. - one st stands up to report. 1.F 2. C 3. A 4. D 5. B - Discuss in groups. - Answers: 1. to apply 5. got 9. am able 2. am 6. can 10. hearing 3. attended 7. reading 4. passed 8. know - Read their letters aloud - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:30/09/2012 Period 19+20 REVISION I. Objectives: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 1. unit 2 and unit 3. II. Language focus: - General knowledge in unit 1, unit 2 and unit 3. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. III. Skills: ,Practising grammar. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board,copies of paper.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
V. Procedures:
I- To-infinitive& Gerund
Choose the most correct answer: 1. We are looking forward _____ you again soon. A. to see B. to seeing C. saw D. have seen 2. My mother was afraid to let the boy _____ the tree. A. to risk climbing B. to risk to climb C. risk climbing D. risk to climb 3. I remember _____ but he said I did not. A. to buy him a book B. buy him a book C. buying him a book D. to have bought him a book 4. Remember _____ john a present . today is his birthday. A. send B. to send C. sent D. sending 5. I suggest _____ some more mathematical puzzles. A. do B. to do C. doing D. done 6. Would you mind _____ the door? A. open B. to open C. opening D. opened 7. You should give up _____ or you will die of cancer. A. smoke B. to smoke C. smoking D. smoked 8. The driver stopped _____ a coffee because he felt sleepy. A. have B. to have C. having D. had 9. That old man tried to stop _____ because of his bad health. A. smoke B. smokes C. smoked D. smoking 10.There is nothing prevent us from______ the mystery of that palace. A. discover B. discovery C. discovering D. discoveries
II- Basic Tense

Choose the most correct answer: 1.I _______this film twice. A. see B. saw C. will see D. have seen 2.Peter, please help me do the washing up. Sorry, Mum. I ______ TV. A. watch B. am watching C. had watched D. watched 3.The farmers _____ in the field now. A. were working B. have worked C. worked D. are working 4.The war _____ out three years ago. A. broke B. had broken C. has broken D. was breaking 5.He ______ a cup of coffee every morning. A. drinks B. drank C. is drinking D. has drunk 6.She ______ a lot of new books. A. had just bought B. has just bought C. buys D. bought 7.Up to the present, Nam_____ good work in his class. A. does B. has done C. had done D. did 8.At present, that author ______ a historical novel. A. is writing B. was writing C. has written D. had written
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
9.How long _____ able to drive? since 1990. A. could you B. have you been C. were you D. are you 10.They ______ since eight oclock. A. are talking B. have been talking C. talk D. talk 11.My brother _______ in the army from 1990 to 1995. A. served B. has served C. had served D. is serving 12.I _____ the money from him yet. A. havent received B. dont receive C. will receive D. am receiving 13.This is the most interesting book _____ . A. Ive read B. I had read C. Ive ever read D. Ive ever read 14.I ____ him ten days ago. A. see B. saw C. have seen D. will see 15.It ______ a long time since I last saw him. A. is B. was C. will be D. had been 16.Mr. John_______ to Los Angeles in 1992. A. had gone B. has gone C. went D. was going 17.What ______ to you yesterday? A. happened B. did happen C. had happened D. has happened 18.I never go to Australia. I _____ to Australia yet. A. will go B. went C. havent been D. have been Why ______ you come yesterday? 19. A. couldnt B. cant C. didnt D. A and C 20.My mother ______ in this factory since 1990 A. works B. worked C. has worked D. had worked Date of preparing:30/08/2012 Period 21: Forty
five minute test (1)
I. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words. 1. A. food B. foot C. school D. afternoon 2. A. put B. full C. June D. pull 3. A. biology B. ecology C. historical D. morning 4. A. she B. ten C. sent D. red 5. A. make B. made C. dad D. date II. Choose the best answer among A, B, C or D that best completes each sentence. 6. Many people lost their homes in the Earthquake. The government is trying to establish more shelters to care for A. the childless B. the homeless C. the blind D. the deaf 7. I can't........ to her any more. A. talk B. tell C. say D. utter 8. Most of the children come from large and poor families, which.........them from having proper schooling. A. makes B. prevents C. leads D. gets 9. What.........when I saw you yesterday? A. were you doing B. you did C. did you do D. have you done 10. He........in hospital for a week so far.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
A. was B. would be C. had been D. has been 11. Our teacher is very proud.........her work. A. in B. at C. of D. with 12. The man...........I had seen before wasn't at the party. A. whom B. that C. D. All are correct. 13. Information technology is very............to our lives. A. useful B. useless C. use D. usefully 14. A computer is a............typewriter which allows you to type and print any kind of document. A. magically B. magical C. magic D. magician 15. Can you help me find the man...........saved the girl? A. which B. whom C. who D. whose 16. All of those..........in favour of the motion, raise your hands. A. who are B. who is C. whom are D. whom is 17. Now Peter has got a new house. He an old one. A. use to live B. use to lived C. used to live D. used to living 18 ..his homework yet? A. Does he do B. Has he done C. Did he do D. Had he done 19. I enjoy to the radio while I am driving. A. hearing B. watching C. seeing D. listening 20. Let's.for a walk. A. went B. to go C. go D. going III. Choose the underlined part among A, B, C or D that needs correcting. 21. They aren't used to drive on the left. A B C D 22. How long has you known the teacher? A B C D 23. Many ethnic children doesn't know how to read and write. A B C D 24. She has breakfast at 8.30, then she go to work immediately. A B C D 25. That's the man who daughter is studying with me. A B C D
IV. Choose the correct sentence among A, B, C or D which has the same meaning as the given one.
26. The last time she used the Braille alphabet was one year ago. A. She hasn't used the Braille alphabet a year ago B. She haven't used the Braille alphabet a year ago. C. She has used the Braille alphabet for a year. D. She hasn't used the Braille alphabet for a year. 27.There are a lot of people. The people like to do things together. A. There are a lot of people who like to do things together.B. There are a lot of people whom like to do things together. C. There are a lot of people who like do things together. D. There are a lot of people which like do things together. 28. She has just made this dress. A. She could make this dress but she didn't. B. She didn't make this dress before. C. She has never made any dress before. D. This dress has just been made by her. 29. I have never seen such an interesting film. A. This is the first time I have seen such an interesting film. B. This film is the best I have ever seen. C. This is the first time I saw such an interesting film. D. This is the best film that I saw. 30. I'm not used to getting up early on Sundays. A. I have to get up early on Sundays. B. I don't want to get up early on Sundays. C. I feel strange to get up early on Sundays. D. I always get up early on Sundays. V. Read the text below and choose the correct word or phrase for each space. Computers are helpful (31) ....... many ways. First, they are fast. They can work with information (32) ........ more quickly than a person. Second, computers can work with (33).........information at the same time. Third, they can (34) .........information for a long time. They do not forget things the common people do. Also,
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
computers are (35)........always correct. They are not perfect, of course, but they usually do not make mistakes. 31. A. in B. by C. through D. on 32. A. hardly B. even C. wholly D. entirely 33. A. a little B. a lot of C. plenty D. much of 34. A. stay B. remain C. hold D. keep 35. A. most B. mostly C. almost D. hardly VI. Read the text and questions below. For each question, circle the letter you choose A, B, C or D.
Louis Braille was born in France in 1809. His father had a small business. He made shoes and other things from leather. Louis liked to help his father in the store even when he was very small. One day when Louis was 3 years old, he was cutting some leather. Suddenly the knife slipped and hit him in the eye. He soon became completely blind. When he was ten years old, he entered the National Institute for the blind in Paris. One day his class went to visit a special exhibit by a captain in the army. One thing in the exhibit was very interesting for Louis. It showed message in code. Armies send messages in secret codes so no one else can read them. The captain wrote this code in raised letters on very thickjjaper. Louis thought a lot about this code. Then he decided to write in the sames way so the blind could "read" with their fingers. It is very difficult to feel the differences between raised letters. Instead of letters, Louis used a "cell" of six dots. He arranged the dots with two dots across and three down. So blind people can read and write even write music by Braille.
36. Louis Braille's father made things from.......... A. leather B. wool C. exhibit D. codes 37. When Louis was ten years old. he began to study.......... A. at a local school B. at a university C. at a special school for the blind D. in the army 38. He saw a special exhibit. It showed...........in code. A. messages B. systems C. arrangements D. computers 39. It is difficult to feel the differences between.......... A. coded messages B. arrangements of dots C a system of raised dots D. raised letters 40. Which of these sentences is probably not true? A. Braille invented a system of reading for blind people. B. Braille visited an exhibit of codes. C. Braille system is used for everyone. D. Louis Braille was an intelligent boy. - THE END-
1B 11C 21C 31A
2C 12D 22B 32B
3D 13A 23B 33B
4A 14B 24C 34D
Correcting the test 5C 6B 15C 16A 25B 26D 35C 36A
7A 17C 27A 37C
8B 18B 28D 38A
9A 19D 29A 39D
10D 20C 30C 40C
Date of preparing: UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Period LESSON 1: READING I. Objectives: - Students know more about the study of disabled children - Students know about special education and the Braille Alphabet. II-Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive - The +adjectives -Which as a conector. 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning special education. III- Skill: Reading: - Reading comprehension: to match words in column A with their meaning in column B, to choose the best answers. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 3ms - Aims: Sts get used to the topic. - Ask sts to match an adjective in A with its meaning in B: A B - Look at the board and listen to 1. deaf a. unable to see. the teacher. 2. dumb b. unable to hear. 3. blind c. unable to use a part of of their body normally. 4. disabled d. unable to speak - Work in groups to match an - Ask sts to work in groups to match adjective in A with its meaning in the items. B. - Ask one st from one group to present - One st presents the ideas. the ideas. 1 - b; 2 - d; 3 - a; 4 - c - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher's remarks. - Check and ask sts to read the - Listen and repeat. adjectives in A aloud. 2. Before you read: - Aims: to prepare information and - Work in groups to list out. vocabularies for the topic. Eg: get up, wash my face, have - Ask sts to work in groups of three or breakfast, go to school by bike, four to list out their daily activities. listen to the teachers, write the - Ask some sts from different groups to lessons, talk to friends, play report their ideas. soccer, watch TV , etc. 12ms - Point out some activities. - Write the list on the board ask sts to Eg: go to school by bike, listen to point out what activities would be the teachers, write the lessons, difficult for disabled people to do. talk to friends, play soccer, watch TV, etc.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
- Ask sts to study the Braille Alphabet and then work in pairs to work out the message below the alphabet. - Introduce some new words: + retarded ( adj) : less developed than normal. + Proper schooling(phr): enough and good study at schooling. + Opposition(n): opposing ideas/ disagreeing ideas(viewpoints). Opposed to ( adj) + Make efforts (v): try, attempt. + To be proud of..... (phr): = To take pride in..... + add( v) : + ; subtract ( v ) : + finger (n) ( demonstration ) - Ask sts to listen and read the words again then ask some sts to read again. - Listen and check. 3.While you read: - Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks. + Task 1: Matching. - Ask the sts to read the passage individually and do Task 1: the words in A appear in the reading passage. Match them with their definition in B. - Encourage sts to guess the meaning of the words in the context. - Tell sts to compare their answers with a partner. - Call on some sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Give correct answers and explain all the words carefully to make sure the students understand the meaning of the words + Task 2:Multiple choice. - Ask the students to read the passage more carefully and complete the sentences by circling the corresponding letter A, B, C, or D. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask sts to share the answers with their partners.
- The message: " We are the world" - Copy the words into their notebooks.
- listen and repeat. - some sts stand up to read the words again.
- Read the passage and do the task individually. - Share their answers with their partners. - Some sts give out their answers. 1. c; 2 e; 3 a;4 - b ; 5 - d. -Listen and self-correct the exercise. - Copy down
- Students do the work individually - Compare their answers with their partners. - 5-6 students do orally while others listen to them. 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
8ms
2ms
- 5-6 students are required to give 5. D answers in front of the class(1 students/ - Self-correct the work 1 time/ 1 answer). - Listen and help the sts to do the exercise correctly - Read the summary passage carefully. - Give explanation to some words/ - Do the task individually. phrases or expressions if needed 4. After you read: - Aims: Give the summary of the topic. - 10 students give answers orally - Ask sts to work individually and read 1. disabled 2. read the summary of the passage carefully. 3. write 4. efforts - Encourage them to guess the missing 5. opposition 6. time-consuming words. 7. maths 8. arms - Have sts complete the summary. 9. figures 10. proud - Note: Sts may not be familiar with - self-correct this kind of exercise. T should provide help when necessary. - Call on some sts to read the completed summary aloud in front of the class. - Give feedback and correct answers: 5. Homework: - Asks students to learn by heart the new words. -Prepare part B.
VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:
UNIT 4: SPECIAL EDUCATION
Period LESSON 2: SPEAKING I. Objectives - Sts can talk about someones school life and actively engage in an interview II-Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive - The +adjectives -Which as a conector. 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning special education. III- Skill: Speaking:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Making an interview : Matching - Asking and answering about school life of a student. - Reporting on results. IV. Teaching aids - textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up 3ms Aims: Sts recall the words on school. - Asks sts to work in groups and make - Work in groups. a list of words relating to school. The - Suggested words: words must be correctly spelled and Subjects: English, maths, related to the topic. literature,........... - Ask some groups to report. Tests, breaks, homework, teacher, - The group with the longest list will students,.....Secondary school , be the winner. high school....... 2.Before you speak: Aims: Sts can match the words, give Sts answer: 15 the correct answers - My favourite subjects are Math, ms - Asks sts some questions: English.... + What are your favourite subjects? - I dont like .......... + Which one dont you like? - It takes me about ........ + How much time do you prepare for your lessons every day? - Work in pairs to fill the right + Task 1: Fill in blanks with the right questions into the blanks. questions - Some sts give their answers - Asks sts to study the questions in the A - 4 ; B - 1 ; C - 2 ; D -6; interview carefully and work in pairs. E - 3 ; F - 5 ; G - 7 - Ask some sts to give their answers in - Two sts read the interview aloud front of the class. - Listen and give the correct answers. - Ask sts to work in pairs and carry out the interview using the right questions . 3. While you speak: - Work in pairs , ask and answer Aims: Sts can ask and answer about the questions on board using his or 15 school life of their partner. her own information to answer the ms + Task 2 questions. - Write the questions in task 1 on - The student in role of the board and ask sts to work in pairs ,ask interviewer takes notes the and answer about their school life information of the partner in their using the questions on board. notebook. - Go round to help sts when - One pair stand up to present their necessary. T can play the role of the interview.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
S1: Which lower- secondary school did you go to? - Ask one pair to present in front of S2: I went to Nguyen Luong Bang the whole class. lower- secondary school in Thanh Mien District. ........................ - Listen and ask other sts to give remarks. - Give remarks. 4. After you speak: - Work individually using the Aims: Sts can tell about their example in the textbook as the partners school life. beginning: + Task 3: " Hanh went to Lequi don lower 10m - Ask some sts to tell the whole class school......" s what they know about their partner using the notes from the interview. - Ask other sts to listen to their classmates and comment on presenters work. - Listen and make necessary corrections. 5 Homework: Write a paragraph about their partner's 2ms study at school( about 150 words) VI-EXPERIENCES:
interviewee to help sts if necessary.
Date of preparing:
Period LESSON 3: LISTENING I. Objectives: - Sts know about a special photography club. II-Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive - The +adjectives -Which as a conector. 2.Vocabulary:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Vocabulary concerning special education - Verbs to describe everyday activities - Vocabulary on photography III- Skill: Listening: Sts develop the following skills:- marking True/false statements, filling in the gaps - retelling the story. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: 5ms Two sts talk about their school. Others listen and give remarks 2. Before you listen: Aims: to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words in the listening text. - Work in groups to discuss the a. Ask sts to discuss the following questions. questions in groups: + Have you ever taken part in a club? What kind of club is it? - Some sts present. + What are the club activities? + What do you think of the club activities? - Ask sts to present. b. Introduce some words related to photographs: 15m - 'photograph (n) = photo s - pho'tography (n) : the art of taking photos. - photog'raphic (adj) - pho'tographer (n): the person - Read the words after T and some whose job is to take photos. read individually - photo'genic(n): looking more - Work in pairs read the text and do beautiful in photos the task - Ask sts to read the words after T - Some sts give answers and give and calls on some sts to read remarks individually - Ask sts to read the text carefully and use the given words to fill in the gaps. Sts work in pairs. - Ask some sts to give answers and give remarks . * Introduce some new words/ - Copy the words and phrases. phrases - sur'roundings (n): everything around you/ the place
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
where you live - 'sorrow (n): sadness - mute (v): = dumb (unable to speak) - exhi'bition (n) an exhibition of paintings/ photos ... ex'hibit (v) - 'labourer (n): a person who does hard work (with his hands and body) - 'stimulate(v): = encourage(v) - Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: +Task 1 Aims: Practice listening for specific information by deciding if the given statements are true or false. - Introduce the talk about a very special photography club: The Vang Trang Khuyet Club. T asks sts to listen and tick on the box to indicate True or False statements. - Ask sts to have a look at the statements and read them in pairs and make sure they understand the statements. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/T and tick the box to indicate if the statements are true or false. T 20 reads/plays the tape twice. ms - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer. - Read/ play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2 - Ask sts to listen to the talk again and fill in the gaps with the suitable word.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud
- Listen to the T
- Work in pairs to read the statement. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their answers - Give their answers. Key: 1-T; 2-F; 3-T; 4-F; 5-T. - Check their answers and then correct their work if they have the wrong answers.
- Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Encourage sts to fill in / guess the - Compare their answers. most suitable words to fill in the - Give their answers. gaps 1. photography 6. simple - Read the conversation / play the 2. 19 7. peaceful tape twice. 3. exhibition 8. chickens - Ask sts to compare their answer in 4. 50 9. stimulated pairs. 5. beauty 10. escape - Check sts answers. - Check their answers, say it aloud, - Read/ play the tape once again, and then correct their work if they stop the tape where necessary and have the wrong answers. conduct the correction. IV. After you listen:( for advanced Sts ask and answer in groups. students} - Ask sts to work in groups and tell each other about the photography club. Sts may need to use the following suggested questions: 5ms - Who are the members? - What are they doing? - How many photos are on display? - What are the photos about? One/ two pairs present. - What does the passion help them? - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class. - Give remarks. IV. Homework: - Write a short paragraph about the Vang Trang Khuyet Club/ another 1ms club. VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparin Period
Teacher: T Vn Bnh

LESSON 4: WRITING
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I. Objectives: - Students can write a letter of complaint. II-Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive - The +adjectives -Which as a conector. 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning special education. III- Skill: Writing: - Reading: read the advertisement. - Speaking: work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Writing: complete a letter of complaint using the suggested information. IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm-up: 3ms - Aims: to introduce the topic and to raise sts' interest in the topic. - Ask sts: " What kind of letter do - Listen to the teacher's question. you write when you feel angry about something or unhappy with something?" - " a letter of complain" - Suggest: " A letter of complaint or a thank-you letter?" - "Yes/ No" - " Have you ever written a complaint letter?" - " Do you know how to write a complaint letter?" - Introduce the topic of the lesson. 2. Before you write: - Read the advertisement in pairs . 20ms - Aims: to help sts to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. - Copy these words into theit + Ask sts to work in pairs and read notebooks. the advertisement. - Explain some new words: + native teacher (n): teacher from English - speaking counties( England, The USA, Australia...) - Listen and read after the teacher. + free (a): cost nothing - Some sts stand up and read aloud, + air-con'ditioned (a): to be other sts listen and give remarks. equipped with air- conditioner. - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then some sts stand up to read - Answer teacher's questions:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
again. - Move round to conduct the activity and to help sts if necessary. - Ask some questions to make sure that sts understand the advertisement. T: Do Vietnamese teachers teach in this center? T: How many students are there in a class? T: Do you have to pay for books and cassette tapes? T: Are there air- conditioners in the classrooms. T: What time do the classes start and finish? - Give the correct answers. + Task 1: - Ask sts to read the requirement of this task and make sure they know what they are going to do. - Ask sts to work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Give the first example:( ask one st to play A's role) T:( reply) No, I'm not happy with it at all. T: No, not all of them are native speakers. - Note sts that their answers may vary from one to another. - Move round to help sts and to encourage them to speak naturally. - Ask two pairs to report . - Ask other sts give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the letter of complaint in the book. - Introduce briefly the structure of a complaint letter. A letter of complaint usually includes three main parts: Teacher: T Vn Bnh
S1: No, there are only native teachers. S2: No more than 20 students. S3: No, they are free. S4: Yes, all the rooms are airconditioned. S5: They start at 5.30 p.m and finish at 8.30p.m
- one st asks the teacher and other listen carefully. S: Are you happy with your study at English For Today Center? S: Are all the teachers native speakers? - Work in pairs to complete the dialogue. - Two pairs report their answers . - Sample answers: 3. that's not true. My class has over 30 students. 4. I had to pay for them. 5. only some of them. Mine is not. 6. in fact classes often start late and finish early. - Read the incomplete letter. - Listen to the teacher. - Copy to their notebooks. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the dialogue in task 1 again and prepare to write.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
15ms
Opening - Explaining the problem. - Suggesting a resolution - Ask sts to write the second part of the letter basing on the dialogue in task 1. - Remind sts that this is a formal letter so they should not use contractions and that they should use connectors to make their writing smoother. - Suggest some connectors: first of all, firstly, secondly, furthermore, in addition, to make the matter worse, finally... 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing the second part of the letter basing on the information in task 1 . - Let sts write the letter. - Move around to conduct the activity.
- Do the writing task.
5ms
1ms
- Read their writing: " First of all you say that there are only native teachers, but my class 4. After you write: has one Vietnamese teacher and two - Get feedback by asking one or two native teachers. You also say that sts to read their work aloud. each class has no more than 20 - Ask some other sts to give students but there are over 30 remarks. students in my class. In the - Check and give the correct advertisement , you say we can have answer. books and cassette tapes free of charge but in fact we had to pay for them. To make the matter worse, the classroom is not air-conditioned. That is quite different from the advertisement. Finally, the class time is not the same as what the advertisement says. Classes not only start late but also finish early." 5. Homework: - Part D ( page 16- workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date of preparing
Period LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound /o/ from the sound / o:/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students can use " the + adjective" as a noun, review "used to + infinitive" and combine two sentences with " which". II-Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Used to + infinitive - The +adjectives -Which as a conector. - Pronunciation: /o/ and / o:/ 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning special education. III- Skill: Language focus - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: ( 5mins) - Ask one st to do the homework on the - One does the exercise on the 5ms board board. - Look at their friend's task. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Aims: to introduce two sound /o/ and / 10ms o:/ and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds. pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Listen to the teacher and - Tell sts the difference between two repeat. sounds. - Look at the book , listen and - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen repeat. and repeat. top call boss sport
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 52 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /a/ and the words containing sound / o:/. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: 27ms a. Aims: to introduce " the + adjective"as a noun and have sts do Ex 1. - Present the use of " the + adjective" by giving examples. E.g: The young are very active. Her real joy is looking after the old. - Focus sts on the underlined words and ask them to try to guess their meaning. - Give the answer: " we use "the + adjective" to describe a group of people." - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Explain any new words if necessary + 'ambulance (n) : a kind of vehicles used to carry sick/injured people. + unemp'loyed (n) : without a paid job. - Read these words aloud and ask sts to listen and read these words again. - Ask some sts to read again and check. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
doctor four ................. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /o/ socks on top box job / o:/ lost doctor walking called sport ................
- Read the examples. - Try to guess the meaning S: - The young = young people - The old = old people.
- Copy these words.
- Listen and repeat. - Some sts read again. EX 1: 1. the injured 2. the unemployed 3. the sick 4. the rich..... the poor
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. b. Aims: to review " used to + infinitive" and get sts to do Ex 2. - Ask sts to recall the use of " used to" by giving an example: " She used to get bad marks when she - Think about the teacher's was at primary school" question and answer: - S: We use " used to + - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and infinitive" to talk about past then share the answers with their actions or past habits that no friends. longer exist. - Move round to help if necessary. - Do the exercise individually - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the and compare their answers with board. their partners. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Do the exercise on the board. 2. used to have 3. used - Check and give remarks. to live 4. used to eat 5. used to be c. Aims: to revise the use of " which" as 6. used to take 7. used a connector and ask sts to do exercise 3. to be - Recall sts of the relative clauses with " 8. did you use to go which" used to refer to the whole of the earlier clause. - Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex2 and read the example carefully. - Explain the example if necessary. - Ask sts to do this exercise. - Go round to conduct the activity. - Listen to the teacher. - Ask some sts to read sentence by sentence. - Read the requirement and the - Listen and give remarks. example carefully. 5. Homework - Do Ex 3. 3ms - Part B ( Page 24- workbook) 2-c 5-a 3-f 6-d 4-g 7-b VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:10/09/2012
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND
YOU
Period: 27 + 28 LESSON 1: READING I. Objectives: - Students know more about computers. II. Language focus: 1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology. 2.Grammar: -Present perfect. -Present perfect passive. -Relative pronouns: who, which,that III. Skills: Reading - Reading comprehension: to match words in column A with their meaning in column B, to find the best title for the reading passage and then answer the questions. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking 5ms - Ask two sts to do EX2 and EX 2: EX4 in the workbook on the 1. stimulate 2. origin 3. board. disabled 4. sorrow 5. professional 6. opposition 7. time - consuming 8. exhibit EX 4: 1. She used to play the piano but she hasn't played the piano for years. 2. She used to be very lazy but she works very hard these days. - Ask other sts to give remarks. ............................. - Give remarks and marks. - Look at the board and listen to the 2. Before you read teacher. - Aims: to prepare information 12ms and vocabularies for the topic. - Ask sts to look at the textbook and work in pairs to match each - Work in pairs to match the items with numbered item with one of the words/ phrases. words or phrases in the box. - Move round to conduct the - Key: 1- D ; 2 - E ; 3 - G ; 4 - C ; activity. 5-A;6-F;7-B;8-H - Ask some sts to give feedback. - Listen to the teacher's remarks. - Check and give remarks. - Introduce some new words: - Copy the words into their notebooks. + mi'raculous ( adj ) : remarkable.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
23ms
+ de'vice ( n ) : a thing for special purposes. + a'ppropriate ( adj ) : suitable + 'storage ( n ) : the storing of information + 'data ( n - U ) : information. + 'memo ( n ) : a record of agreement. + leave ( n ) : the time that a person is permitted to be absent from work. - Ask sts to listen and read the words again then ask some sts to read again. - Listen and check. 3.While you read: - Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks. + Task 1: Matching. - Ask the sts to read the passage individually and do Task 1: the words in A appear in the reading passage. Match them with their definition in B. - Encourage sts to guess the meaning of the words in the context. - Tell sts to compare their answers with a partner. - Call on some sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Give correct answers and explain all the words carefully to make sure the students understand the meaning of the words + Task 2: Passage Headings. - Ask the students to read the passage more carefully and choose the best title for it. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Let sts dicuss the answer with their partners.
- listen and repeat. - some sts stand up to read the words again.
- Read the passage and do the task individually.
- Share their answers with their partners. - Some sts give out their answers. 1. c; 2 - e; 3 a; 4 - b ; 5 - d. -Listen and self-correct the exercise. - Copy down - Students do the work individually - Compare their answers with their partners. - C . What can the computer do? - Self-correct the work
- Work in pairs to to ask and answer. - Answers: S1 : What can the computer do to help us in our daily life? S2: It can help us visit shops, offices and places of interest; pay bills; read newspapers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask one st to give the answer S3: Why is a computer a miraculous and encourage them to explain device? their choice. S4: Because it is capable of doing - Give further explanation and anything you ask; it can speed up the tyhe correct answer. caculations, ect. - Give explanation to some words/ phrases or expressions if needed. - Suggested ideas: + Task 3: Answering questions. 1. Advantages: - Ask sts to work in pairs and - storing data answer the questions using the - a means of entertainment cues. - a useful device in many services. - Go around the class and 2. Disadvantages provide help if necessary. - a waste of time and money on games. - Call on some pairs to report in - being harmful to people's health front of the whole class. - spam or electronic junk mail. - Listen and give remarks. 4. After you read - Aims: Give sts a chance to discuss the topic.. - Ask sts to work in groups to discuss two questions: 1. What are the advantages of 8ms computers? 2. What are the disadvantages of computers? - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask some representatives to report. 5. Homework: 2ms - Part A ( page 28 ). VI-EXPERIENCES:
YOU
Period: 29 Class 10 10
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND

Date of teaching LESSON 2: SPEAKING Students absence Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 I. Objectives: - Sts know about the uses of modern inventions - General knowledge: Sts can talk about the uses of the modern inventions in daily life such as radio, TV, fax machine, air conditioner...... . II. Language focus: 1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology. 2.Grammar: -Present perfect. -Present perfect passive. -Relative pronouns: who, which,that . III. Skills: + Speaking: - Asking and answering about the uses of the modern inventions. -Talking about the uses of the information technology. + Reading: - Using the suitable verbs to complete the sentences. IV. Teaching aids Textbook, chalk, board, pictures of some modern inventions. V. Procedures: Teachers activities 1. Homework checking 5ms - Ask two sts to talk about the uses of computers in daily life. - Listen and give the corrections. 2. Before you speak Aims: Sts get used to the topic and then they ask and answer 10m about the uses of modern s inventions. - Give some pictures and writes the names of these inventions on board: a. Electric cooker e. Computer b. Refrigerato f. Cassette player c. Television g. Air conditioner d. Washing machine h. Fax machine - Ask sts to give name for the each modern invention. - Ask some sts to read their names aloud and then give remarks. + Task 1: Asking and answering - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer about the uses of
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Time
Students activities
- Look at the board and think about these inventions.
- Sts read the name of the inventions in chorus and then individually.
- Work in pairs. -Suggested answers: 1. Could you tell me what the radio is used for? Well, its used to listen to the news and learn foreign languages. 2. Could you tell me what the TV is
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
mordern inventions basing on the cues. - Do the first example: + Have you got a cell phone? Yes, ....../ No,........ +Could you tell me what the cell phone used for? Well, it s used to talk to people when you are away from home. - Give sts the form of the questions and answer: Question: What is the ............. used to..........? Answer: It is used to ........+ infinitive or infinitive phrase. - Go around to help sts if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report. - Listen and give remarks. 3. While you speak Aims: Sts practice completing the suitable verbs to talk about the uses of modern inventions. + Task 2: Completing sentences - Ask sts to read all the verbs in the box and explain some of 15m them: s + transmit ( v ) truyn thng tin + process( v ): x l thng tin + make use of: s dng, tn dng - Ask sts to read the new words. - ask sts to work in pairs - Go around to help sts. - Ask some sts to read the sentences aloud in front of the class. - Listen and give correct answers: 5. After you speak
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
used for? Well, its used to watch the news, performances and football matches. 3. Could you tell me what the fax machine is used for? Well, its used to send and receive letters quickly. 4. Could you tell me what the electric cooker is used for? Well, its used to cook rice, meat, fish and keep food, rice warm. 5. Could you tell me what the air conditioners is used for? Well, its used to keep the air cool or cold when its hot or cold.
- Read all the new words and make sure they know them. - Read the new words . - Work in pairs to find the suitable verbs - Some sts to read the sentences 1. store 2. transmit 3. process 4. send 5. hold 6. make 7. send 8. receive 9.design - Work in groups to discuss.
- Work in group. - One or two students talk about the uses of information technology: - It allows us to ....... - It can help us store .... transmit ...... process .......
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Aims: Sts can talk about the uses of modern inventions + Task 4: - Ask sts to work in groups to talk about the uses of information 12ms technology using the information above. - Go around to help sts. - Ask one or two sts to present in front of the class. 3ms - Listen and give remarks . 5. Homework Write a passage about the uses of information technology. VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:12/09/2012
UNIT 5: TECHNOLOGY AND YOU
Period: 30 LESSON 3: LISTENING I. Objectives: - Sts know how difficult it is for the elderly to learn how to use a computer. II. Language focus: 1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology. 2.Grammar: -Present perfect. -Present perfect passive. -Relative pronouns: who, which,that . III. Skills: - Listening and marking True/False - Listening and filling in gaps - Speaking: Discussing and retelling the story IV. Teaching aids: - chalk, board, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: 5mi - Two sts tell the whole class about ns the roles of information technology in our daily life. 2. Before you listen: Aims: to focus sts on the topic and
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10m review/ introduce the words and s phrases used in the listening text. - Ask sts to work in groups and make a list of modern electronic/ digital devices that they use daily and then compare their list with other groups
- Work in groups and make a list of the modern devices on a sheet of paper Sts compare theirs notes. - TV - radio - camcorder - computer - camera - cell phone ............................. - Discuss in groups - Some sts stand up and give their answer.
- Ask sts to discuss if it is difficult to learn how to use these devices - Ask some sts to give their answer. - Look at the words and read after T /the tape. - Asks S to look at the words in the book and read after T / the tape. - Copy the words and phrases. - Introduce some new words - 'memory (n): the power to remember things - re'fuse (v): say 'no' when - Listen and repeat. someone asks you to do st. - Read the words in pairs and correct - ex'cuse (n) saying sorry for each others mistakes. doing st wrong - Some individuals read the words - Read the words again and ask sts aloud to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: 20m + Task 1 s Aims: Practise listening and marking True/ false. - Introduce the topic: An old company director talking about his experience of learning how to use the computer. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/ teacher reading and decide whether the given statements are true or false. - Ask sts to read the statements to see if they understand them. - Play the tape/ read the text twice
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen to the T.
- Read the statements in pairs. - Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. F 2. T 3. T 4. F 5. F 6. F - Check their answer, say it aloud, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
8ms
2ms
and ask sts to tick to the box to indicate T/ F statement and underline the false information - Ask sts to compare their answer in - Work in pairs to read the passage pairs. and try to fill in the gaps. - Check sts answer. - Listen and do the task. - Play the tape once again, stop the - Give their answer. tape where necessary and conduct - Check their answer, say it aloud, the correction. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. + Task 2 1. invited 2. still 3. refused Aims: Practice listening for specific 4. excuse 5. anything information by filling in the gaps. - Ask sts to have a look at the passage and read them in pairs and make sure they understand it. T - Work in pairs. encourages sts guess the word to fill in the gaps. - Ask sts to listen to the tape/T once or twice again fill in the gaps with - One/ two sts present. the missing words. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 4. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in pairs and use the suggested sentence and the information in Task 1 and 2 to retell the story about the old director. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask one or two sts to retell the story in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. IV. Homework: Write a short paragraph about how they learnt to use the computer
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Period: 31 LESSON 4: WRITING I. Objectives: - Students can write simple instructions on how to use some household appliances. II. Language focus: 1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology. 2.Grammar: -Present perfect. -Present perfect passive. -Relative pronouns: who, which,that III. Skill : Writing -Read the set of instructions on how to use a public telephone. - Speaking: work in pairs and in groups to read the set of instructions and to answer the questions. - Writing: write a set of instructions on how to operate a TV with a remote control. IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Warm-up: 5ms - Aims: to introduce the topic and to raise sts' interest in the topic. - Ask sts to in groups to match the - Listen to the teacher. word in A with the words in B. A B 1. insert a. the long pips - Work in groups to match. 2. make b.a button 3. press c. a card 4. hear d. a call - Ask a member of a group to present - A st stands up to present the the ideas. ideas: - Listen and check. 1 - c ; 2 - d ; 3 - b ; 4 - a. - Introduce the topic of the lesson. 2. Before you write: 18ms - Aims:to give sts a chance read samples of some instructions and to help sts to prepare vocabulary and information before they write.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Explain some new words: + lift ( v ) : raise something + re'ceiver ( n ) : the part of a telephone that receives the sound. + slot ( n ): a narrow opening to put a card or a coin in + 'ambulance ( n ): a special vehicle used to for carrying sick people to hospital. + remote control ( n ): ( picture ) + cord ( n ): ( realia ) - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then some sts stand up to read again. + Task 1: -Ask sts to work in pairs and read the set of instructions on how to use a public telephone. - Move round to conduct the activity and to help sts if necessary. - Ask some questions to make sure that sts understand the instructions. T: What should I have to make a call? T: How many stages are there to operate the telephone? T: What number shoudl I dial to call the fire service? - Listen and check. + Task 2: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the instructions again and find out the connectors and the imperative form of the verbs. - Move around to help sts if necessary. - Ask sts to compare their answers with other pairs. - Ask 2 sts to read their answers aloud. - Ask other sts give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. + Task 3:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen to the teacher. - Copy these words into theit notebooks.
- Listen and read after the teacher. - Some sts stand up and read aloud, other sts listen and give remarks. - Read the set of instructions in pairs .
- Answer teacher's questions: S1: You will need a phone card and the number you are calling. S2: There are four stages. S3: You should dial 114.
- Work in pairs to do the task. - Two sts read their answers aloud: + Connectors : first, next, then, until. + Verbs : lift, insert, press, wait. - Check their answers and correct them if they are wrong . - Listen to the teacher and then work in pairs. - Some pairs report: S1: What do you have to make sure if you want to operate the ... ? S2: If you want to operate ..., you
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to look at the TV and the remote control in the picture and then work in pairs to answer the questions. - Move round to conduct the activity and to help sts if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report and check.
have to make sure that the cord is plugged in and the main is turned on. ...............................
10ms
5ms
1ms
- Do the writing task. - Read their writing: 3. While you write: "....................................................... - Aims: Sts practise writing a set of .......... instructions on how to operate a TV To turn on the TV, press the with a remote control. POWER button - Let sts write the instructions. To turn off the TV, press the - Move around to conduct the POWER button again. activity. To select a programme, press the 4. After you write: PROGRAMME button. - Get feedback by asking one or two To watch VTV1, press button sts to read their work aloud. number 1. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. To watch VTV2, press button - Check and give the correct answer. number 2. 5. Homework: .................................. - Part D ( Page 33- workbook)
VI-EXPERIENCES: Date of preparing:
Period: 32 LESSON 5: LANGUAGE FOCUS I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound / u / from the sound /u:/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the present perfect, the present perfect passive and the relative clauses with " who, which" and "that." II. Language focus: 1Vocabulary:-Words to talk about modern technology. 2.Grammar: -Present perfect. -Present perfect passive. -Relative pronouns: who, which,that III. Skill : Pronunciation and grammar + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5ms - Ask one st to tell their friends how - One st speaks aloud in front of the to make tea in front of the whole whole class. class. - Give remarks. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation: 10ms - Aims: to introduce two sound / u / and /u:/ and help sts to practise these sounds. - Write down two sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board - Listen to the teacher and repeat. and pronounce them clearly twice, - Look at the book , listen and repeat. then ask sts to repeat. / u/ /u:/ - Tell sts the difference between put food two sounds. pull school - Ask them to look at the textbook, full tooth listen and repeat. ................. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to - Look at the book and work in pairs. read the words again so that they - Answers: can check for each other. /u/ /u:/ - Move around to help . could Miss June - Ask two sts to read again and give put Moon remarks. book shoes b. Ask sts to look at sentences in full boots page 60 in the book. look school - Ask them to work in pairs to read ................ the sentences and then find out the words containing sound / u / and the words containing sound /u:/. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
28ms
- Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: a. Aims: to revise the present perfect tense and have sts do Ex 1. - Ask sts to think about the present perfect and tell the teacher the form and the use of this tense. - Ask one st to present. - Ask some sts to give examples. - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Ask two sts to do this task on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Listen and give remarks.
+ Form: ( + ) S + have/ has + PII ( - ) S + have/has + not + PII ( ? ) Have/ Has + S + PII ? + Uses: - The present perfect expresses the idea that something happened in the past before now at an unspecified time in the past. - Do the task individually and then share their ideas with their friends. - Two sts do this task on the board. EX 1: 2. He has turned on the TV. 3. He has tidied the house. 4. He has cleaned the floor. ............................ - Listen and correct their work if necessary. + Form: ( + ) S + have/ has + been + PII ( - ) S + have / has + not + been + PII ( ? ) Have / Has + S +been + PII ? - Do the exercise individually and compare their answers with their partners. - Do the exercise on the board.
b. Aims: to review the present perfect passive and get sts to do Ex 2. - Ask sts to tell the teacher the form of the present perfect passive. - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the book. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. c. Aims: to revise the use of "who, which, that" as relative pronouns and ask sts to do exercise 3. - Recall sts of the relative clauses with " who,which, that".
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
1. A new hospital for children has been built in our city. 2. Another man-made satellite has been sent up into space. 3. More and more trees have been cut down for wood by farmers. ................................. - Listen to the teacher. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the requirement carefully.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task individually. - Go round to conduct the activity.
- Ask some sts to read sentence by sentence. 2ms - Listen and give remarks. 5. Homework - Part B ( Page 30 - workbook) VI-EXPERIENCES: Date for preparing:
- Do Ex 3. 1. which 2. which 3. which 4. who 5. who
6. who 7. who 8. which/ that 9. which 10. who
UNIT 6: AN EXCURSION
Period: 33 LESSON 1: READING I. Objectives: - Students know more about some famous places in Vietnam and read an informal letter in English.. II-Language focus: 1- Grammar: - The present progressive tense ( with a future meaning). - Be going to ( Near future) 2- Vocabulary: - Words to talk about outdoor activities or activities in an excursion. III- Skill: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: to do multiple choice exercise and to answer the questions . IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 3ms Aims : Sts get used to the topic. - Ask the sts to work in groups of - Work in groups of 3-4 students three or four and make a list of famous places in Vietnam. - 3 students speak aloud. - 3 representatives are required to speak out the lists in front of the - Listen to their friends and the teacher. class - Check if who has the longest list wins the game.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. Before you read: Aims: to prepare information and vocabularies for the topic and to 15ms provide students with new words/phrases. a.Vocabulary: - Provide the students with new words/phrases. + Lotus (n): hoa sen + resort (n): ni ngh + picturesque site (n): ni p nhu tranh + cave ( n ): hang ng + permission (n): s cho php. to get smbs permission : xin php ai + persuade (v): thuyt phc - Read each word twice and ask the sts to repeat it. - Leave the sts 1 minute to selfpractice. - Ask 1-2 sts to read all the words/phrases aloud in front of the class - Listen and help the students to read the words/phrases correctly. b. Matching: - Ask sts to work in pairs to match the photos with the information given. - Ask one st to report the answer and ask him/her to say the names of these places if they can. - Ask some other sts to tell the teacher which of places they would like to visit and the reasons as well. 3. While you read: 17ms Aims: Sts read the letter for information to do the tasks. + Task 1: Multiple choice. - Ask sts to read the letter individually and choose the best answer( A, B, C, or D) to complete
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen and then copy down
- Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Read these words silently. - Others listen. - Self-correct.
- Work in pairs - One st report the answer: 1 - d ( Thien Mu Pagoda) 2 - b ( Ha Long Bay ) 3 - a ( One-pillar Pagoda ) 4 - c ( Da Lat ) - Some sts stand up and speak aloud.
- Do the task individually. - Share their answers with their partners. - Report their answers: Key: 1 C 2D 3-A
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
each of the sentences. - Tell sts to compare their answers with a friend. - Call on some sts to report and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. - Give correct answers to the sts Task 2:Answering questions. - Ask the students to work in pairs and answer the questions. - 5 pairs of students are required to act out orally in front of the class.
- Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. 1. They are going to have some days off at the end of the first term . 2. Because they want to understand more about rock formations and many of them have never been inside a cave. 3. Its only over 20 kms. 4. They are going to have a two - day trip and a night campfire. 5. Lan is anxious about her parents permission. They may not want to let her stay the night away from home. - Listen and self-correct.
- Listen and check the answers in front of the class. - Work individually. 8ms 4. After you read: - Work in pairs to compare the Aims: Give the summary of the answers. topic. 1. going to go on 2. some caves - Ask sts to work independently and 3. want to see 4. have learnt fill in each blank with a suitable 5. their trip 6. only problem group of words from the text. 7. to persuade them 8. her classmates - Ask them to read the summary carefully before doing the task. - Ask the sts to compare the answers with a friend. - one or two sts are required to read the completed summary. 2ms - Check and give feedback 5. Homework: ( 1 min ) - Part A ( page 35 ). VI-EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date for preparing: Period: Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching
LESSON 2: SPEAKING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know about a boat trip. - Students can talk about the seat plan on a boat trip on Lake Michigan in Chicago. II. Skill: Speaking - Asking and answering about the seat plan on a boat trip. - Talking about a boat trip abroad. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: Time 5ms Teachers activities 1. Homework checking - Ask one st to talk about their excursion which they like best. - Listen and give corrections. 2 Before you speak Aims: focus sts on the topic and introduce new words - Ask sts to look at the picture (page 67) and give the new words: + sundeck (n): platform extending from side to side of a ship + get sunburnt (v): the skin hurt or destroyed by the sunlight + travel sickness (n): the state of being sick due to traveling + non airconditioned >< air conditioned + refreshment (n): room that serves food and drinks to refresh in a boat + occupied (adj ): being kept, in use - Read these words aloud and ask sts to listen and repeat. + Task 1: Students activities - One st talks about his/ her excursion.
12ms
- Look at their books in page 67
- Listen and take notes.
- Listen and read the new words and then sonme sts stand up and read again.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
a. Ask sts to work in groups to get the information about the people in the pictures. - Ask sts some questions: 1. Where doesn't Mrs Andrews like to sit? 2. What does she want? 3. Where does Susan want to sit? 4. What doesn't she wantt? .................................. b. Ask sts to list all the seats for each person - Ask sts to work in groups. - Move around to help sts if necessary. - Ask some sts to report.
- Work in groups to read the information . - Some sts answer the teachers questions 1. She doesn't want to sit in the sundeck. 2. She wants to see all the students. 3. She wants to be near Mary. 4. She doesn't want to get sunburnt. ....................... - Work in groups to find the best seat for each person. - Some sts report. S1: Mrs Andrews seats arent in the sundeck but can help see all the students: seats 46, 43, 40, 45, 34. S2: Marys seats have plenty of fresh air : seats 31, 37, 19, 20, 26, 32. S3: Johns seats arent air conditioned; suitable for taking photographs: seats 10, 11, 12. S4: Tim seats are in the sundeck: 1, 6. S5: Sam seats can help a good view, safe: seats 16, 29, 34
- Check and give remarks.
3. While you speak 15ms Aims: Sts practice asking and answering about the seat plan on an boat trip. + Task 2: Deciding the best seat for each person. - Ask sts to read the model in the book. - Ask sts to work in groups to do the task. - Give sts some useful expressions: What do you think?/ What is your idea? I think Mary should ....... Shed better ............. Seat ..... would be better ........ Maybe you are right but I still think that ...... - Ask sts to make the conversation
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the seat plan and read the conversation in the textbook as an example - Work in groups to call all the suitable seats for each person. - Some sts present to give the answers. A: Now lets begin with Mrs. Andrew. Which seat seems suitable for her? B: I think she should sit in seat 12. From here she can see all the students. C: But look! Its in the sundeck and she doesnt like it. What about seat 34? A: OK. I think she will like it, so seat 34 for Mrs. Andrew.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
like the example in the book. ............................................... - Go around to help if necessary. - Call on some sts to conduct the conversation in front of the class. - Listen and check. - Work in pairs to discuss the plan. 4. After you speak - Some sts talk about their seat 10ms Aims: Sts practice making the preference in front of the class. conversation to arrange the seats on a boat trip for themselves. + Task 3: Giving reasons - Ask sts to work in pairs and discuss : Which seat do you think the most suitable for you? Why? Use information in Task 1 as suggestions - Call on some sts to talk about their seat preference in front of the class. - Listen and give corrections. 2ms 5. Homework-Asks Ss to learn by heart the new words and prepare Listening part. VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date for preparing:
LESSON 3: LISTENING Students absence Notes
Period: Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching
I. Objectives: - Sts know about a weekend picnic in the Botanical Garden. - The past simple tense - Vocabulary on sts' everyday life
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
II. Skill: Listening: - Listening and ordering pictures - Listening and filling in gaps - Listening and answering questions - Discussing and making a plan for a class picnic III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tapes and cassette. IV. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Before you listen: 10 Aims: focus sts on the topic and ms review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups to ask and answer the a. T asks sts to work in groups and questions asks each other the following questions. - Do you often go for a picnic? - Who do you go with? - When is the best time for a -Some sts stand up and give their picnic? answer. - Why do people go for picnic? - Ask some sts to give their answer. - Read after T . b. T asks S read after T / the tape the - Copy the words and phrases. words in the textbook without looking at them. - Introduce some new words +destination (n): e.g.: the train to Hanoi: Hanoi is the ~ + glorious (adj): famous / wonderful / beautiful. - Listen and repeat. + spacious (adj) adj of space - Read the words in pairs and correct + left-overs (n): foods left after a each others mistakes. meal - Some individuals read the words + delicious (adj): good. tasty aloud. - Read the words again and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words - Look at the pictures and listen to the again. T. 2. While you listen: 22ms + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and ordering pictures. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the - Describe the other pictures in pairs. pictures in the textbook and describe - Listen to the teacher.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
each picture. - Give one example: "In the first picture is a peaceful place with green trees, a big lake and white clouds in the sky." - Introduce the situation about a st talking about a picnic to the Botanical garden. T asks sts to listen to the teacher reading and number the picture in the correct order. - Read the text twice. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer. - Read the text once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims: Practice listening for specific information by filling in the gaps. - Ask sts to have a look at the given sentences and read them in pairs and make sure they understand them. T encourages sts guess the words/ phrases to fill in the gaps. - Ask sts to listen to T once or twice again fill in the gaps with the missing words/phrases. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer. - Read the text once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 3: Aims: Practice listening for specific information by answering given questions. - Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions and know what information they need to answer the questions. - Ask sts to listen to T once/twice
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen to the teacher and do the task. - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. Key: 1a 2e 3b 4c 5f 6d - Check their answer and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Work in pairs to read the passage and try to fill in the gaps. - Listen and do the task. - Give their answer. 1. was just a few 2. to pay a visit 3. at the school gate 4. a short tour 5. playing some more - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Work in pairs to read the questions. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes. - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. 1. It was very nice. 2. Yes, it was.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10ms
3ms
and take short notes to answer the questions. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Read the text once again, stop where necessary and conduct the correction. 3. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in group and plan for their picnic this weekend. - Ask sts to pay attention to the times, means of transport, picnic sites, food, equipment... - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask two sts to report in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 4. Homework: Write a short paragraph about how they learnt to use the computer
3. It was beautiful. 4. Because it was so peaceful and quiet in the garden. 5. They took pictures, played games, talked, sang and danced. - Work in groups.
-Two sts present.
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date for preparing: Period: Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching
LESSON 4: WRITING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students can write a confirmation letter responding to a request or an invitation. II. Skill: Writing: write confirmation letters.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities 1. Homework checking : 5ms - Ask one st to talk about his/ her plans for the picnic if his/ her class could have one. - Ask other sts to listen to their friends and give remarks. - Check and give remarks. 2. Before you write: - Aims:to give sts a chance read the 20ms sample letters and to help sts to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. + Task 1: - Ask sts to look at two letters in page 69. - Explain the definition of " request " and " confirmation " letters : + Request is the letter that asks for information or help. + Confirmation is the letter that responds to the request. It confirms whether the help is provided or the information is available or not. - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the two letters and to find the requests in Nga's letter and confirmation in Hoa's. - Ask sts to pay attention to the structure showing requests and confirmation. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask sts to compare their ideas with other pairs. - Ask two sts to say their answers aloud. - Listen and give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the situations in this part. - Explain some new words: + bunch ( n ): things of the same kind
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students' activities
- Listen to their friend and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Listen to the teacher carefully. - Copy these words into theit notebooks.
- Read the letters in pairs.
- Share their ideas with other sts. Requests: "Can you go shopping with me to buy the things we need for the trip?" Confirmation: Certainly, I will help you to prepare everything you need for the trip. I will be waiting for you at 2.30 p.m. - Listen to the teacher. - Copy these words.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
12ms
7ms
grouping together. Eg: a bunch of bananas/ keys. + 'wildlife ( n ) : life of fre animals/ plants in the nature. + a'ccept ( v ): > < refuse - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then some sts stand up to read again. - Ask sts to read the situations in 2 minutes and then ask them some questions to make sure they understand the situations. - Ask some sts to answer T's questions: T: What is Lan going to do? T: What does she ask you to do? T: Will you help her? T: What does Minh want to do? ............................... - Remind sts that these are informal letters so they can use abbreviations and that they should mention the information in requests again. 3. While you write:( - Aims: Sts practise writing one of the two confirmation letters. - Divide the whole class into two groups and ask sts in each group to write one letter. - Let sts write in 8 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write: - Get feedback by asking two sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks
- Read after the teacher and then some sts stand up to read them again. - Read the situations thoroughly.
S1: She 's going to have birthday party at..... S2: She asks me to buy her two bunches of... S3: Yes, I will. S4: he wants to borrow a book about ..... .................................. - Listen to the teacher and take notes.
- Read their writing: 1. Dear Lan, It's great to hear about your birthday party. Sure, I'll help you with the shopping this Saturday. It wouldn't be a problem. And I'll bring them to your house befoer the party. I want to help you prepare the party, too. I'll see you on Saturday then. Hang. 2. Dear Minh, Sure you can have my book. I've just finished reading it. But 9 a.m . this Saturday is not a good time . I won't be home at that time. Can you come later? Is 10 a.m. good for you?
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Tell me what you think. Tung 5. Homework: ( 1min) - Write the other letter. VI-EXPERIENCES: 1ms
Date for preparing:
Period : LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS I. Objectives: - Students can distinguish the sound / / from the sound / :/ and pronounce them correctly. - Students revise the present progressive( with a future meaning) and be going to II. Skill: - Pronunciation: / / and / :/ - The present progressive ( with a future meaning). - " Be going to". III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. IV. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5ms - Ask one st to read his/her - One st speaks aloud in front of the confirmation letter aloud . whole class. - Give remarks. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation: 10ms - Aims: to introduce two sound / / and / :/ and help sts to practise these sounds. - Write down two sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and - Listen to the teacher and repeat. pronounce them clearly twice, then - Look at the book , listen and ask sts to repeat. repeat. - Tell sts the difference between two // / :/ sounds. teacher bird - Ask them to look at the textbook, together work listen and repeat. about church ................. - Read these words in pairs and
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 60 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound / / and the words containing sound / :/. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: 28ms Aims: to revise the present progressive with a future meaning, " be going to" and have sts do Ex 1, EX 2 and EX 3. - Give two examples: eg: Fiona is having a birthday party next Saturday. I'm feeling unwell so I'm going to see the doctor some time this week. - Ask sts to think about the use of present progressive and " be going to" in these sentences. - Ask one st to present. - Remind sts that " be going to" can also be used to predict something with some evidence. Eg: The ceiling looks unsafe. I think it's going to fall. - Notes: Avoid using the present progressive with " be" and " go" - Ask some sts to give examples. + Exercise 1:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: // / :/ about heard pagoda excursion father birds teacher learning river German ................
- Read the examples.
+ The present progressive: a definite arrangement. + "Be going to": an intention to do something in the future although no definite arrangement has been made. - Listen to the T attentively and take notes.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task individually. - Go round to conduct the activity. - Ask some sts to read sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks.
- Do the task individually and then share their ideas with their friends. EX 1: 1. are you doing 3. Are you going to 2. is getting married. 4. am going to be sick. 5. is going to - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: 1. is going 2. are having 3. is going to catch 4. are you putting 5. isn't going to give - Listen to the teacher. - Read the requirement carefully. - Do Ex 3. 1. Are you going to see it?/ I'm visiting to see it. 2. we are going for a picnic. 3. is he going to do with it / he 's going to buy a villa. 4. It's going to rain. 5. is going to clean them.
5. Homework 2ms - Part B (Page 37 - workbook) VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date for preparing: Period: TEST YOURSELF B I. Objectives: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 4. unit 5 and unit 6. II. Language focus:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- General knowledge in unit 4, unit 5 and unit 6. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. III. Skill: listening, reading and writing. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 5ms 1. Homework checking: EX 3: - Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the 1. is going to be 2. am not using workbook on the board. 3. is going to rain 4. are having 5. is going to buy 6. are doing 7. are you leaving 8. is coming/ is - Ask one st to give remarks. travelling/ 9. am meeting. - Give remarks and marks. - One st gives remarks. 2. The new lesson: - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part IV at home in advance to save time. - Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. - Ask sts to do listening in class. - Look at the textbook and try to 10ms 2.1. Listening: understand the information in the - Ask sts to read the table in the table. textbook. - Introduce new words: - Copy these words into their + in'habitant (n) : a person living in notebooks. a place - Listen and read after the teacher. + lo'cate (v) : build in a place - Listen carefully and do the task. location (n) - Work in pairs to discuss their + stroll (v) : walk slowly answers. - Read the text twice and ask sts to 1. 50 miles to the west of London try to complete the table in the 2. 120,000 inhabitants/ people second time. 3. market town 4. biscuit - Ask sts to share their ideas with factory. their partners. 5. computer industry 6. in central - Read the text again so that sts can England check their task for the last time. 7. 90,000 people 8. university - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on 9. car factory 10. Cowley the board. Road - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Check and give feedback. 10ms 2.2. Reading: - work in groups to share their ideas. - Ask sts to work in groups to - one st stands up to report. compare their answers. 1.F 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. - Ask one st to report his/ her T
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
answers aloud. - Listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: 10ms - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board.
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 10ms 2.4. Writing: - Ask some sts to to read their letters aloud. - Ask some sts to give ramarks. - Listen and give remarks on: + form + grammar and vocabulary + ideas + style 3. Homework: - Part D ( Page 40 - workbook)
- Discuss in groups. - Answers: 1. by scientist 3. there is attempts 5. all the the 7. inventions a by 9. it is wanted?
2. for other 4. which 6. organizing 8. developed 10. it be
- Read their letters aloud - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
VI-EXPERIENCES: Period 37+38:
Forty five minute test 2

Name.................................... Class:... Mark Teacher's comment
I-Language focus:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
A-Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. A. because B. caught C. laugh D. autumn 2. A. wood B. choose C. boot D. pool 3. A. picture B. suggest C. sunburnt D. future 4. A. proper B. shop C. clock D. morning 5. A. encourage B. problem C. excellent D. kitchen B. Find and correct the mistake in each sentence. 1. Did he used to smoke a lot when he was young? A B C D 2. The blind is unable to see anything. A B C D 3. Every evening since last Christmas, I take my dog out for a walk in the park. A B C D 4. It's eleven o'clock and you don't finish breakfast yet. A B C D 5. The fax machine broke down yesterday, but it is working again. It has repaired. A B C D II. Reading Choose A,B,C or D to fill each numbered space to complete the letter. 14 Hillside Road,Dover. December 12th, 2005 Dear sir, I am writing to complain (1)..... the car that I (2)..... from you yesterday. It is just a heap (3)..... scrap; when I (4)..... to start it this morning the key wouldnt turn in the lock, the battery was flat and two of the plugs needed (5)..... . Then when I finally got it going, the bonnet wouldnt stay closed and the drivers side door fell (6)..... . And I tried to stop to (7)..... up the door, the brakes didnt (8)..... so I crashed into a tree and smashed the radiator. Also, one of the wheels came off. Do you really think this car is (9)..... $150? Well, if you do, I dont. What are you going (10)..... about it? Yours faithfully, Eric Smith 1.A. about 2.A. buy 3.A. for 4.A. took 5.A. changing 6.A. of 7.A. get 8.A. go 9.A. valuable B. of B. has bought B. of B. got B. changed B. off B. give B. come B. worth C. on C. had bought C. in C. tried C. change C. away C. pick C. do C. cost D. at D. bought D. on D. gave D. to change D. on D. come D. work D. sold
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10.A. to do B. do C. to doing D. did III. Writing: A. Combine the sentences to make one sentence using the relative pronouns. Make any necessary changes. 1. The bus goes up Oxchard Avenue. It doesn't stop at the supermarket. ..................................................................................................................................... 2. I am lazy. This annoys my parents. ............................................................................................................................ 3. The performance went on for three hours. It was carefully prepared. .............................................................................................................................. 4. Jill always come to class late. This makes the teacher angry. ......................................................................................................................... 5. The film is about a girl. The girl runs away from home. ...................................................................................................................... B. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. They have taught her how to sew. She has................................................................................. 2. They have built a school near our house. A new school ............................................................. 3. He has just cleaned the windows. The windows have .................................................................. 4. It's the first time I 've ever met such a famous person. I have never ............................................. 5. I haven't seen him since I was a student. I last ............................................................................
Answers
I. Language focus: A. 1.C 2.A 3.C B. 1. A he use 2. B are unable 3. B have taken 4. C haven't finished 5. D has been repaired
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
4.D
5.A
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
II. Reading 1. A 2. D 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. B 7. C 8. D 9. B 10. A III-Writing: A. 1. The bus which goes up Oxchard Avenue doesn't stop at the supermarket. 2. I am lazy, which annoys my parents. 3. The performance which was carefully prepared went on for three hours. . 4. Jill always come to class late, which makes the teacher angry. 5. The film is about a girl who runs away from home. B. 1. She has been taught how to sew. 2. A new school has been built near our house. 3. The windows have just been cleaned. 4. I have never met such a famous person before. 5. I last saw him when I was a student. ........................................................................................................................
..
Date: 10/11/2010 Period : 39 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10
UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I. Objectives: - Students read about TV programme schedules and complete the following tasks. II. Language focus: 1.Vocabulary: - Words to talk about the media: kinds of mass media,programmes of radio and TV, advantages and dis advantages... 2.Grammar: - The present simple tense. - Because of/ inspite of III. Skill:- Reading comprehension: Read for general ideas and specific information. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 3ms 1.Warm-up: Aims: sts get used to the topic. + Jumbled words. - Give 5 words about the forms of mass media whose letters are in the wrong order and ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 sts to rearrange them in good order to make the right words. 1. enslieisov 2. rwepeapns 3. idora 4. agenmzia 5.evido - 4 representatives are required to write the words on the blackboard. - Check and give remarks. 10ms 2. Before you read: Aims: to prepare information and vocabularies for the topic. + Pairwork: - Ask the sts to work in pairs to answer the question given in the part and some other questions. - For each question, 3-4 sts are required to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 st/ 1 time). - Gather the ideas and give some background information about TV channels in Vitetnam. + VTV1: Combination of Politics, Economics and Entertainment. + VTV2: Science and Education.
- Work in groups of 3-4 sts - Sts write the words individually on the blackboard 1. television 2. newspaper 3. radio 4. magazine 5. video - Listen to the teacher.
- Work in pairs. - Do the work orally in front of the class.
- Listen and copy down.
- Listen and then copy down

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20ms
+ VTV3: Sports and Entertainment. + VTV4: For the overseas Vietnamese. + VTV5: For the Ethnic minority groups + Vocabulary: - Provide the students with new words/phrases + channel (n) : Knh ( truyn hnh) + Mass media (n): public institutions that report news and other stories . + Population and Development (phr): Dn s v pht trin + TV Series (n): Phim truyn hnh di tp + Folk Songs (n): Dn ca nhc c + News Headlines (n): im tin chnh + Weather Forecast (n): D bo thi tit + Quiz Show (n): tr chi truyn hnh + Portrait of Life (phr): Chn dung cuc sng + Documentary (n): Phim ti liu + Wildlife World (n): Th gii thin nhin hoang d + Around The World (phr): Vng quanh th gii - Read each word/phrase twice and ask sts to repeat it and leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 st to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class - Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks.
- Listen and repeat. - Some sts stand up and read these word aloud. - Others listen. - Self-correct.
\ - Work in pairs to read the programmes and do the task. - Share their answers with their friends. - Some sts present their answes: 1 c; 2 a; 3 d; 4 b - Others listen.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10ms
2ms
+ Task 1: Matching. - Ask sts to read the TV programme schedules and do task 1: Match the words in A which appear in the reading passage with their definitions in B. - Sts are required to compare their results with their partners. - 4 sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). - Listen and help sts to do the task correctly. + Task 2: True or false: - Sts are required to read the programmes carefully, individually and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). - 5 sts are required to give their answers orally, individually in front of the class with the evidence in the reading passage. - Listen and check the answers orally in front of the class. + Task 3: Answering questions. - Ask sts to work in pairs and answer the questions in the book basing on the information in the reading passage. - 6 pairs are required to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 pair/ 1 time). - Listen and help sts to answer the question correctly. 4. After you read: Aims: to give the summary of the topic. - Sts are required to work in pairs to tell their partners about one of the TV programmes they like watching best and explain why. - 2-3 sts are required to give short talks on the given topic. - Get feedback and help the students to give correct talks 5. Homework: - Write a paragraph about a programme
- Work individually 1. T 2. T 3. F ( The Nature of Language is on VTV3.) 4. T 5. F (VTV1 starts at 5:35 and the last programme starts at 23:30 - Others listen and check. - Work in pairs. - Some pairs stand up and ask and answer: 1. There are five films on. 2. At 9:00 a.m, 12:00 at noon, 7:00p.m, 11:00p.m on VTV1 and 7:00p.m on VTV3. 3. VTV2 4. The Quiz Show. 5. (You should watch) VTV1 6. Football - Work in pairs. - Some sts talk in front of the whole class. - Others listen. - Listen and self-correct.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
you like best. VI-EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students know about the differences and similarities of some popular types of the mass media. II. Skill: - Speaking about different types of the mass media. - Discussing about the features the types of the mass media have in common and the main features each of them has. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking 5ms - Ask one st. to talk about the TV - One student talk about the TV programme they like watching best. programme they like best.
7ms
2. Before you speak - Write the new words and read Aims: Sts distinguish the different them aloud. types of the mass media from the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
others. - Introduce some new words: + 'orally ( adv ) : spoken by mouth + 'aurally ( adv ) : seen by eyes + 'visually ( adv ): heard by ears - Ask sts to read the new words orally. + Task 1: - Ask sts to work in pairs and decide which items are types of the mass media. - Ask sts about the definition of the mass media: Mass media ( take a singular or plural verb) : communication media in general- all of the communication media that reach a large audience, especially television, radio and newspapers. - Call on some sts to explain their answers in front of the class. - Give sts correct answers. 3. While you speak Aims: Sts compare the features of the 18ms types of the mass media. + Task 2: Work out what features the types of the mass media have in common and what main features each of them has. Ask sts to use the cues below. - Ask sts to read some phrases: present receive provide information and entertainment get deliver - Give sts the meaning of those words if they dont know. - Ask sts to work in pairs and carry out the activity using the cues in the book. - Go around the class and help sts if necessary. - Call on some pairs to explain their answer in front of the class.
- Work in pairs - Listen and take notes. - Some sts give their answer in front of the class. 1. Television 2. Radio 3. Newspapers 4. The Internet
- Read after the teacher and ask the meaning if they dont know.
- Work in pairs to discuss some popular types of the mass media. - Some sts give the answers in front of the class. + The mass media: - Provide information and entertainment + The radio: Present information and entertainment orally (through mouth) Receive information aurally(through ears) .................................
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to look at the information above and talk about the different types of mass media. eg. The common feature of the mass media is that they all provide information and entertainment. Television provides information and entertainment orally and visually, and we receive them through our eyes and ears. ......................................... 4. After you speak 12m Aims: Talking about the different s types of the mass media. + Task 3: - Ask sts to work in groups and answer the following questions: +What are the different types of the mass media? + What features do they have in common? + What are their distinctive( own) features? - Ask sts some more questions : Which types of the mass media do you usually get information from? Which one do you like most? Why? - Go around to help sts if necessary. - Ask some sts to answer and give correct answers. 5. Homework: - Write a paragraph ( about 50 words) about the features of the types of mass media. 3ms
- Work in groups to answer the questions in the book. S1: Television, radio, newspapers, the Internet. S2: Provide/ deliver information and entertainment. S3: TV presents information and entertainment orally and visually while radio provides ........... - Some sts answer: I like TV most because I can watch films and performance on it/ I prefer newspapers because I can choose to read them whenever I have free time, and I can also choose to read only what Im interested in. ............................................... ...
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Date: 11/11/2010
Teacher: T Vn Bnh

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I. Objectives: - Sts understand 2 news stories on the radio and di the exercises. II. Skill: - Listening: tick on the word they heard, fill in the gaps, answer the questions - Speaking: Retell the stories III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tape IV. Procedures: Time Teachers activities 1. Before you listen: 10m Aims: focus sts on the topic and s review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. + Pairwork: - Ask sts to work in pairss and asks each other the following questions. - How often do you listen to the radio? - Which program do you like listening to? - Do you like listening to strange stories? - Ask some sts to give their answer. + New words + Mount (n): e.g.: Mount Everest + in spite of + N (phr): = despite + N = Although + Clause - Give some examples - Read the words asks sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 2. While you listen:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students activities
- Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions
- Some sts stand up and give their answer. - Copy the words and phrases. - Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud.

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
23ms
+ Task 1: (7 mins) Aims: Practise listening and tick the word they hear. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to two news stories and the words will appear in the stories - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the words given and guess what the news stories about. - Ask sts to listen to the news and tick the right column to indicate which words appear in which stories - Play the tape twice and ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer.
- Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. News story 1: strong, cloudy. News story 2: healthy, young, highest, wonderful - Check their answer, say it aloud, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the - Work in pairs to read the passages tape where necessary and conduct the and try to fill in the gaps. correction. - Listen and do the task. - Give their answer. + Task 2: (8 mins) News story 1 Aims: Practise listening for specific 1. has caused floods information by filling in the gaps. 2. has left their homes - Ask sts to have a look at the stories 3. have risen in the textbook and read them in pairs 4. two metres and make sure they understand them. 5. has stopped T encourages sts to guess the words/ 6. cloudy phrases to fill in the gaps. 7. strong wind - Ask sts to listen to the tape once or News story 2 twice again to fill in the gaps with the 1. twenty third 2. 4,418 missing words/phrases. 3. California 4. wonderful - Ask sts to compare their answer in 5. young and healthy pairs. - Check their answer, say it aloud, - Check sts answer. and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the - Work in pairs to read the correction. questions. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ Task 3 (7 mins) Aims: Practice listening for specific information by answering given questions. - Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions and know what information they need to answer the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice and take short notes to answer the questions. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. Two sts present. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 10ms - Listen and check. 3. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in pairs and each retell one news story. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask two sts to present in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 4. Homework: Write a short paragraph about a news story they have just heard on the radio or TV
- Some sts answer the questions: 1. Heavy rain has caused floods all over the country. 2. Because the rivers have risen. 3. (The old lady has climbed Mount Whitney) 23 times. 4. Because it has kept her young and healthy. - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
2ms
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

I. Objectives: - Students can write a paragraph about advantages and disadvantages of television and other types of mass media. II. Skills: - Writing: write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of the mass media. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5ms - Ask one st to talk about one of the news stories that he/she is interested in. - Listen to their friend and give - Ask other sts to listen to their friend remarks. and give remarks. - Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Before you write: - Aims:to get sts to read about the advantages and disadvantages of 15ms television and to help sts to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. + Task 1: - Ask sts to read the advantages and - Listen to the teacher carefully. disadvantages of television. - Explain some new words: + 'memorable (adj) : easy to remember + en'joyable (adj) : pleasant - Copy these words into theit + popu'larity (n) : the noun of " notebooks. popular" + be a'ware of (v) : realize + brain (n) : part of the body inside the head + 'violent (adj) : fighting, killing, etc. - Listen to the teacher and then read + inter'fere with (v) : get in the way these words in chorus and
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
of something - Ask sts listen to the teacher and repeat , then write these words into their notebooks. - Ask sts to work in pairs to read about the advantages and disadvantages of television. - Make sure that sts know what " advantage" and "disadvantage" are. - Ask sts to pay attention to the basic structures used in the table. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask sts some questions to make sure that they understand all the advantages and disadvantages of television. What are the (dis)advantages of television? - Listen and give remarks. + Task 2: - Divide the whole class into three groups and ask each pair in group 1 to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of radio, each pair in group 2 discuss those of newspapers, and each pair in group 3 discuss those of the internet. - Ask sts to work in 7 minutes. - Move round to help if necessary and then ask them to share their ideas with other pairs. - Ask three three sts to present their ideas. - Ask other sts to give remarks.
individually. - Read the table in pairs. - Structures: + help/encourage someone to do something: help us to learn, encourage us to buy... + make someone/ something + adjective: make things memorable, make us aware of, make us passive, make people violent... S: Television helps us to learn more ............. - Work in pairs to discuss. - Some sts stand up to give their ideas. * Radio: + Advantages: - It helps us to get updated news and infofmation. - It helps us to listen to music, dramas, etc. - It is not harmful to people's eyes. + Disadvantages: - It is rather boring because we can't see anything. - The programmes are not very vivid, there are no games and films, etc. - Listen to the teacher and take notes.
- Do the writing task. 15ms - Listen and give remarks. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of one of the mass media. - Ask sts to write a paragraph about the advantages and disadvantages of
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) "The Internet is now the largest source of information and entertainment for people. Firstly, you
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
9ms
one of the mass media they have discussed in task 2. - Let sts write in 8 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write: - Get feedback by asking three sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer.
- If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks 1m 5. Homework: - Write a paragraph about another types of mass media.
can get a lot of information about any places in the world. The Internet provides you with the latest changes in the markets such as the increase or decrease in the price of gold or oil. You can relax by watching films or football matches, listening to music on-line or chatting to friends or relatives living thousands kilometres away. However, the Internet can be dangerous because you can be exposed to harmful websites, for example, the websites containing violent scenes. Moreover, chatting or playing games online can take you a lot of time. In short, the Internet can be good or bad so you should know how to use it properly."
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 7: THE MASS MEDIA LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound / ei/, /ai/ and /oi/ correctly. - Students revise the present perfect and because of and in spite of. II.Languge focus: - The present perfect tense. - Because of and in spite of. III. Skill: : Pronunciation and grammar: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5ms - Ask one st to tell the whole class the - One st speaks aloud in front of the advantages and disadvantages of one whole class. of the mass media. - Give remarks. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation - Aims: to introduce three sounds - Write down three sounds. /ei/,/ai/ and /oi/ and help sts to - Listen to the teacher and repeat. 10ms practise these sounds. - Look at the book , listen and a. Write three sounds on the board repeat. and pronounce them clearly twice, /ei/ /ai/ /oi/ then ask sts to repeat. play time voice - Tell sts how to pronounce these today wildlife noise sounds accurately. radio height toy - Ask them to look at the textbook, ........................... listen and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check - Look at the book and work in for each other. pairs. - Move around to help . - Answers:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
/ei/ /ai/ /oi/ afraid ninety-nine noisiest b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page made type Royce 79 in the book. mistake Friday oil - Ask them to work in pairs to read the changed like boy sentences and then find out the words ............................... containing sound /ei/, /ai/ and /oi/ . - Read the examples. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: Aims: to revise the present perfect and "because of" and "in spite of" 28ms and have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3. a. The present perfect tense: + The present perfect: - Give two examples: "How long an action has lasted up eg: I've known her for five years. to the present." We have been here since 7.00 - Listen to the T attentively and a.m. take notes. - Ask sts to think about the use of the present perfect in these sentences. - Ask one st to report and recall the use of since and for. b. Present the use of because of and in spite of through some examples. + because of + N/NP, V-ing Eg1: Because of being ill Mary didn't in spite of go to school. + Because of is used as a In spite of being ill Tom went to preposition to express the reason. school. + In spite of is used as a preposition Eg2: Because of the rain we stopped to express a concession. playing football. - Listen to the teacher attentively In spite of the rain they and take notes if necessary. continued playing football. - Ask sts to think about the use of because of and in spite of in these sentences. - Ask some sts to report. - Distinguish because of from because and in spite of from although.
- Ask two sts to read again and give remarks.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask some sts to give examples. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task in pairs. - Go round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to read sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. 5. Homework - Part B ( Page 42 - Workbook)
- Do the task individually and then share their ideas with their friends. EX 1: 1. have been 2. has lived 3. have met 4. have done 5. have had 6. have taken 7. have watched. - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: 1. since 2. ago 3. for 4. for 5. since 6. for 7. ago 8. ago 9. since 10. since - Listen to the teacher.
- Read the requirement carefully. - Do Ex 3. 1. c, f 2. b. d 3. a , e 4. h .j 5. i, g.
2ms
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY VILLAGE

LESSON 1 : READING
I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students can: - Read and understand more about the changes in the country life. II. Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Conditional type 1. - Verb tenses and reported speech. 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary about country life such as bumper crops, cash crops, brick houses, straw, mud..... III. Skill: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: vocabulary matching and table completion exercises. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 4ms 1 .Warm-up: - Aims : - Get used to the topic. - Sts are required to work in groups of 3 or 4 to make a list of words related to the country in written form. - The group with the longest list will be the winner. 2. Before you read: - Aims: - Prepare information and vocabularies for the topic. 10ms - Introduce the topic of the reading passage. a. Pair work: - Ask sts to work in pairs to answer the questions given in the part. - For each question, 3-4 sts are required to answer orally in front of the class ( 1 st/ 1 time). - Gather the ideas and help the sts to give correct answers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Work in groups of 3-4 students - Give the lists to the teacher - Work in pairs. - Do the work orally in front of the class. Suggested answers: 1. The farmers are harvesting the crop 2. They are working very hard. 3. Its a good/ bumper crop. 4. Good farming methods, good varieties, modern technology used, people work hard..... - Listen and then copy down - Repeat.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
b.Vocabulary: - Provide the sts with new words/phrases. + Straw(n): dry cut stalks of various cereals( rm). + Mud(n) : wet, soft soil (bn). - Share their answers with their partners. + Technical high school (n): trng trung hc k thut dy - Report their work . +1b nh + Farming method(n): phng + 2 d +3a php canh tc. +4e + Brick house (n): houses +5c made of bricks( nh xy bng gch). + Thank to(prep): = owing to - Work individually - Study the table. = because of (nh c) - Read each word/phrase 3 times and - Discuss the answers with a friend. - Report their answers. ask sts to repeat it. - Leave the sts 1 minute to selfpractice reading the words, then ask a.o.c before Now 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class - Listen and check. houses 20ms 3. While you read: Made of straw and mud - Aims: Read the passage for Made of bricks information to do the tasks. + Task 1:Vocabulary Matching. - Ask sts to read the passage and do R. and TV task 1: Match the words in A which Few families had a radio or a TV appear in the reading passage with set their definitions in B. Many families have a radio or a TV - Sts are required to compare their set results with their partners. - 4 sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 F.M time). old - Listen and help the sts to do the New task correctly. - Explain the meaning of these words crops and phrases if necessary. poor + Task 2:Table Completion. Good/ bumper
- Read silently. - Others listen. - Self-correct. - Read the passage and then do the task.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to scan the passage to get specific information to complete the table. - Let sts to study the table carefully before doing the task. - Go round the class and provide help when necessary. - Tell sts to discuss the answers with a friend. - Check the answers in front of the class as a whole. - Give correct answers.
travel By motorbike - Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. - Ask sts to report their work in pairs. 1. It was poor and simple. 2. Because they hope that with an education of science and technology their children could find a way of bettering their lives. 3. They introduced new farming methods which resulted in bumper crops. They also helped grow crash crops for export. 4. He said their lives had changed a lot thanks to the knowledge their children had brought home. 5. He told his grandchildren: Study harder so that you can do more for the village than your parents did. - Listen to the teacher. - Discuss in groups. - Some representatives are required to report. - Give suggested answers: + Introduce new farming methods. + Grow crash crops for export. + Help local people apply modern technology in farming. + Help community especially young people access to ways of entertainment. + Raise peoples awareness about food safety and environmental hygiene.
10ms
+ Task 3: Answering Questions: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage again and answer the questions in task 3. - Sts are required to underline the information that supports the answers. - Sts are required to compare their answers with another pair. - Ask 5-6 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Give feedback and correct answers. 4. After you read: - Aims: Give the summary of the topic. + Discussion: - Sts are required to work in groups and discuss the question: How can people with an education help make the life of their community better? - Clarify some terms if needed: + People with an education: people with a university study.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Sts are required to look back to the 1ms passage to get the ideas for the questions. - Go to groups and provide help when necessary. - Ask some representatives to report the groups' ideas. 5. Homework: - Ask sts to write a paragraph about the topic they discussed in After you read. VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date:271/11/2010
UNIT 8: THE STORY OF MY

LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
VILLAGE
Period : 45 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students know about plan to improve life of a village and their possible results. II. Skill: - Speaking about plan and results. - Discussing plans to improve life in the village. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking 5ms - Ask one st. to tell about the life of - One st. tell about the village. the village in the text. - Listen and give remarks and - Listen to the teacher. marks. 2. Warm-up - Work in groups 5ms - Ask sts to work in groups and make a list of the ideas that carried out to improve the village life. Sts may share ideas in Vietnamese and - Listen to the teacher. ask T for English equivalences. - Check ideas and lead in the new lesson. 3. Before you speak: 10m Aims: Sts can match each of the s plan to improve life in the village with its possible result. - Listen and take notes. + Task 1: The village of Ha Xuyen are discussing plans to improve life in the village. Match the plans with
Date of teaching
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
possible results.( 10 minutes) - Explain some new words: resurface (v ):put new surface on, renew widen (v ) canal (n): man-made waterway for irrigation muddy(a ): full of mud - Ask sts to do the task in pairs and give explanation for their answers - Ask some sts to read the answers in front of the class. - Give the correct answers. 10ms 4. While you speak: Aims: Sts practice discussing the plans to improve the life in the village and the possible results. + Task 2: The villagers are discussing their plans. Read and practice the conversation in groups of three. - Read the conversation in the textbook. - Ask sts to work in groups using conditional type 1 and "should". - Briefly explain Conditional sentence type 1 and should: If + S + V(present tense), S + will/can/may + V ( to talk about something that will or is likely to happen in the future) E. g.: If the roads are widened, cars and lorries can get to our village. Should or shouldnt: to give opinions about what is the best thing to do. - Ask sts to practise the conversation in the textbook. - Ask some groups to practice the conversation in front of the class. 5. After you speak: 12ms Task 3: Continue the conversation, using the ideas in table in Task 1. Add some more possible if you like - Ask sts to work in groups and continue the conversation. - Write the main phrases on board
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Work in pairs. - Read the answers aloud in front of the class. 1. b 2. g 3. d 4. e 5. f 6. c
- Listen to the T - Listen and take notes.
- Work in groups of three.
- Some groups practice the conversation in front of the class.
- Work in groups and add some their own ideas. - Some groups present in front of the class. A: I think we should build a football ground, too. B: I agree with you. If a football ground is built, young people can play sports in the free time. C: A football ground is also a place where people can meet and exchange ideas. A: What about a medical centre? I
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
and ask sts to look at these phrases to practice their conversation. - medical center health - cash crops export, money - bridge shorter way to town - football ground play sports, exchange ideas. - Go around to help sts if necessary. Sts may add their own ideas in the conversation. - Comment and give necessary corrections. 3ms 6. Homework: Write a passage about plans to improve the life in the area where you live.
think its necessary to build a medical centre. B: Yes. If a medical center is built, Peoples health will be looked after better. C: Yes. And if we get sick. we wont have to go to the provincial hospital for treatment.
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 28/011/2010

LESSON 3 : LISTENING
VILLAGE
Period : 46 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Sts know the changes in a small town on the South coast of England. II. Skill: - Listening: choose True/ False statements, fill in the gaps with one suitable word, answer the questions - Speaking: Discuss the changes in sts' hometown/ home village III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tape IV. Procedures: Time Teachers activities Students activities 1. Home work checking:) 7ms - One st talks about what people should - One st presents. do to - Others listen and give remarks. improve life in their village/ town. 2. Before you listen: 10ms Aims:to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups to ask and a. Focus sts on the two pictures in the compare the two pictures. textbook and asks sts to work in groups to compare them to see the changes of the town following the
Date of teaching
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
18ms
model in the book. E.g.: - There didn't use to be any hotel in the town - There used to be small houses - Cows used to graze in the field ........................................ - Ask some sts to give their answer. b. Introduces some new words - atmosphere (n): khng kh - resurface(v): tri li ( mt ng) - turn into (v): tr thnh - Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: + Task 1: Aims:Sts practise listening and marking True/ False statements. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to a talk about the changes in a small town in England. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the statements given and guess if they are true or false. - Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the right column to indicate their answer and underline the false information. T plays the tape twice. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer.
- Some sts stand up and give their answer. Sts copy the words and phrases.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud.
- Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to guess if the statements are true or false. - Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. F It's on the south coast of England. 2. F It's used to be a small quiet town. 3. T 4. F The big trees have been cut down. 5. F Some people don't like the changes - Check their answer and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims:Sts practise listening for specific information by filling in the gaps with ONE word. - Ask sts to have a look at the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Work in pairs to read the passages and try to fill in the gaps. - Listen and do the task. - Give their answer. 1. houses 2. hotel 3. widened 4. cut
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
paragraph in the textbook and to read them in pairs and make sure they understand them. T encourages sts guess the words to fill in the gaps. - Ask sts to listen to the tape once or twice again to fill in the gaps with the missing words. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer.
5. car 6. shop 7. department 8. expensive - Check their answer and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Work in pairs.
10ms
1ms
- Play the tape once again, stop the -Two sts present. tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 4. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in pairs and tell each other about the changes in their village/ town. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask two sts to present in front of the whole class. - Check and gives remarks. 5. Homework: Write a short paragraph about the changes in their village/town
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 28/11/2010

LESSON 4 : WRITING
VILLAGE
Period : 47 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students can write a letter giving directions to a certain place. II. Skill: Writing - Reading: read the sample letter. - Speaking: work in pairs to find Ann's house on the map as well as the words and phrases used to give directions . - Writing: write a letter to tell Jim the way to house A on the map. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5ms - Ask one st to talk about the changes in our hometown or his/her home village. - Listen to their friend and give - Ask other sts to listen to their friend remarks. and give remarks. - Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Before you write:
Date of teaching
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20ms
12ms
- Aims:to get sts to read the sample letter and to help them to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. + Task 1: - Introduce the situation. - Explain some new words: + direction (n) : the way that a person or thing moves along + enclose (v): put something in a letter or a parcel - Ask sts to listen to the teacher and repeat , then write these words into their notebooks. - Ask sts to work in pairs to read about the letter and to look at the map to find Ann's house. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask sts to compare their ideas with other pairs. - Ask some sts to tell the whole class where Ann's house is. T may ask them to explain more about their answer. - Listen and give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the letter again and underline the words and phrases used to give directions. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask 2 sts to write these words/ phrases on the board. - Check and give remarks. - Ask sts to make some examples with these words. 3. While you write - Aims: Sts practise writing a letter to Jim, telling him the way to house A from Roston Railway Station. - Ask sts to write a letter to Jim, telling him the way to house A from Roston Railway Station. - Let sts write in 8 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write: Aims: to get feedback and check sts'
- Listen to the teacher carefully.
- Copy these words into theit notebooks. - Listen to the teacher and then read these words in chorus and individually. - Read the letter in pairs. - Share their answer with their friends. - Present their ideas. Answer: H - Listen to the teacher. - Work in pairs to read the letter and undreline the words/phrases. - Two sts write the words and phrases on the board get out of go over ( a bridge) turn right/left walk past ( a medical centre) keep walking take the first/second.....
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph)

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
7ms
work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks
"Dear Jim, I'm very glad that you will come here for the summer holiday ............. from Roston Raiway Station. Now when you come out of the station, turn right. Keep walking for about 5 minutes, you will see a small bridge ahead. Go over the bridge, go along the street, walk past a medical centre and the car park then take the second turning on the left. Walk past the Souvenir shop and you will see my house. It's on the right, next to the shop.............. "
1ms
5. Homework: - Write a letter to tell their friends the way to their house from Hai Duong Railway Station.
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 28/11/2010

LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
VILLAGE
Period : 48 Class 10 10 10 I. Objectives: 1. Education Aims:- Students know how to pronounce the sound /au/ and /u/ correctly. - Students revise reported speech and conditional sentence type 1. II. Language focus: 1.Grammar: - Conditional type 1. - Verb tenses and reported speech. 2.Vocabulary: - Vocabulary about country life such as bumper crops, cash crops, brick houses, straw, mud..... III. Skill: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities
Date of teaching
Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
1. Homework checking 5ms - Ask one st to tell the whole class the way to their house from Hai Duong Raiway Station. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Check and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation: - Aims: to introduce three sounds /au/ 10ms and /u/ and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 89 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /au/ and sound /u/ . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: Aims: to revise the reported speech 27ms and conditional sentence type 1 and have sts do Ex1, EX 2, EX3and EX4. a. Reported speech: Statements - Recall the use of reported speech: to report what someone has said. No quotation marks are used and some parts of speech have to be changed.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- One st speaks aloud in front of the whole class. - Give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Write down two sounds. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. /au/ /u/ cow coat town phone how bone ........................... - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /au/ /u/ shout rose loudly snow ours over ............................... - Read the examples. - Listen to the teacher. - Copy down the example. - Read the example and think about the changes. - Work in pairs to complete the table.
- Some sts report. 1. did 2. would do
4. him/her 5. the night
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Give an example: eg: "I worked late yesterday," said Susan. Susan said she had worked late the previous day. - Ask sts to read the example and think about the changes when we turn a sentence into reported speech. - Ask sts to complete the table below: Direct speech Reported speech (1) do (2) will do (3) might (4) me/you (5) last night (6) there - Ask sts to work in pairs and complete the table and then ask some sts to report and give remarks. - Make clear the difference between say, tell and talk: Say + clause Tell + O + clause Talk (to sb) about sth b. Conditional sentence type 1: - Review the form and the use of conditional sentence type 1 by giving some examples: eg: If I have enough money, I will go to Hue for holiday. If it rains. I won't go there. - Ask sts to read the examples and point out the form as well as the use of conditional sentence type 1. - Distinguish when-clause and ifclause: eg; When summer comes, he will go to Hue for holiday. - Ask sts to compare this example with the first example. - Ask some sts to give examples. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
before 3. may/ might 6. here - Listen to their friends and their teacher. - Listen and copy down. - Read the examples and point out the form and the use of conditional sentence type 1: + Form: If- clause , main clause S + V( P.S) , S + V( S.F) + Use: something that may happen at present or in the future. - When-clause: something that will certainly happen in the future. - Do the task individually and then share their ideas with their friends. EX 1: 1. An old farmer said their lives had changed a lot..... children had brought home 2. She said she was going to Ho Chi Minh City soon. 3. I thought the film would be interesting. ............................... - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: 1.told 2. said 3. said 4. told 5. talked - Listen to the teacher. - Read the requirement carefully. - Do Ex 3.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
3ms
task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task in pairs. - Go round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to read sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. 5. Homework - Ex 4 ( page 90- sts' book)
....... If I do more homework, I will pass my exam. If I pass my exam. I'll go to medical college. If I go to medical colege, I'll study medicine..............
VI-EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 30/11/2010 Period: 49 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10
TEST YOURSELF C
I. Objectives: 1. Aims: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 7.and unit 8. 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 7 and unit 8. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. 3. Skills: listening, speaking and writing. II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. III. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities Students' activities 5ms 1. Homework checking: - Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the EX 4: workbook on the board. 1. If 2. When 3. if 4. If - Ask one st to give remarks. 5. when - Give remarks and marks. - One st gives remarks. 2. The new lesson: - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part IV at home in advance to save time. - Look at the textbook and read the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. - Ask sts to do listening in class. 2.1. Listening: 10ms - Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. - Introduce new words: + queue (v) : xp hng + traffic (n) : cars, motorbikes, traffic lights,.... heavy traffic - Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. - Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners. - Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers. - Ask sts to read the paragraph in part B and try to guess what will be filled in each blank. - Play the tape again . - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board. - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Check and give feedback. 2.2. Reading: 10ms - Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. - Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud. - Listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. 10ms - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board. - Ask two other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 2.4. Writing: 10ms - Ask some sts to read their writing aloud.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
statements. - Try to focus on the important words. - Copy down these words into their notebooks. - Listen and read after the teacher. - Listen carefully and do the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers. 1. F 2.F 3. T 4.F 5. T - Read the paragraph. - Listen carefully and complete the paragraph. 1. aren't 2. evening 3. cinemas 4. theatres 5. knows - work in groups to share their ideas. - Some sts stand up to report. 1. because people can sit comfortable at home, they don't have to pay for expensive seats at the theatres or in the cinemas. 2. People can see films, plays of every kind, political discussions and the latest exciting football matches. ........................ - Discuss in groups. - Answers: 1. have been........... haven't had 2. haven't given .............. have paid 3. said 4. had taken 5. thought ............ would come 6. told............... have got - Read their writing aloud " When you come out of the bus station, turn right. Go straight ahead until you see the traffic lights. Turn left to Redham Road, walk along this street in about 10 minutes. The Indian Restaurant is the pink building on the left after the Beach Parade. It is very easy to find." - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask some sts to give remarks. 3. Homework: ) - Part D ( Page 52 - workbook) VI-EXPERIENCES:
Period:50
REVIEW
Class 10 10 10 I.Objectives: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8. II-Skill : Four skills III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts IV- procedure: 1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance. 2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar 3- New lesson: REVIEW: TENSES & PASSIVE VOICE T Teachers activities Students activities Date of teaching Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Warmer: BINGO -T asks Ss to work in group of eight -Ss listen to write on a small paper and give the Past and Past participle form of thses verbs
Make go run Play learn finish Leave See
- Listen to T and write them , then give the past and PP form of them
PRESENTATION -T asks Ss to give the form of tenses that students have learnt. -Complete in the table
Tenses Simple present Present continuous Past Simple Active S+V(e,es) S+is /am/are+ V-ing S+Ved/V2 Passive S+is/am/are+Vpp S+is/am/are+bein g+Vpp S+was/were+Vp p
Example: 1.They have provided the victims with food and clothing -> The victims have been provided with food and clothing 2.People speak English in almost everycorner of the world. ->English are spoken in almost everycorner of the world. PRACTICE: I .VERB FORM 1.We ( finish) our dinner half an hour ago. 2.How many times you (see)him since he went to Edinburgh. 3.The farmers (work) in the field now. 4.Rivers usually (flow) to the sea. 5.Mrs Green always (go) to work by bus. 6.She (sit) under a tress when it began to rain. 7.She said she (forget) something at home yesterday. 8.When we (see) Mr Taylor tomorrow, I (remind) him of that. II-MULTIPLE CHOICE 1.Jack ..............me that he was enjoying his new class. a. told b.said c.talked d.asked
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
-Work individually - Listen to Ts instruction and complete the table the form of active and passive verbs -Give the other wexamles to illutrate Some Ss read their answers to the class and give their explanation
-Ss work individually -Give the correct form of tenses of verbs in parentheses Expected answer: 1.finished 2.have you seen 3.are working 4.flow 5.goes 6.was sitting 7.had forgot 8.see/ willremind Expected answer:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2.We..............friends since we........ at college together. a.have been-were b.were- have been c.were-were d.had- been 3.If you..............me with this exercise ,I will do the same for you one day. a.helped b.would help c.help d.will help 4.The English ..............good traditions a.have much b.have many c.has much d.has many 5.If he .............., the results will be better a. worked b.works c.has worked d.will work III-MISTAKE CORRECTION 1.Mary is living in LonDon. She have been there for 12 years. 2.If Sarah knew you were here, she willnot go out 3.I have lived in a small house near the coast for 1990. 4.I see this film three times up to now IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8. V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook - Prepare REVIEW: STRUCTURES.
1.told 2.have been were 3.help 4.havemany 5.works
Expected answer: 1.has been 2.would not 3.since 4.have seen
EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Period:51
REVIEW
Class 10 10 10 I.Objectives: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8. II-Skill : Four skills III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts IV- procedure: 1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance. 2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar 3- New lesson: REVIEW: STRUCTURES T Teachers activities Students activities Date of teaching Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
WARMER:Find someone who...... Did you use to........? Name have a favourite toy when you were a child? have a nickname? cry at night when you were a child? hate school? play hide andseek? have a pet? PRESENTATION I SENTENCE TRANSFORMATION -T asks Ss to rewrite each sentence, beginning as shown , so that the mening stays the same. 1.She began to play the piano 3 years ago. >She ..................................................................... . 2.He doesnt play tennis any longer ->He used............................................................. 3.John has invited us to his party tonight. ->We............................................................. 4.Sharah got lost and this made her parents very worried. ->Sharah got lost .............................................. 5.Although the children was poor, they were happy. ->In spite of............................................................. 6.Look at these louds !There s no rains on the way. -> Look at these clouds! Its ................................... 7.Because he works harder, he will pass the exam. -> Because of.......................................................... II-FORM : 1.S+ began /started + V-ing /to-inf................ago ->S+has/have/+(been)+ Ving/Ved..............since/for 2.Not.....any more/any longer -> No longer/ used to + V-inf 3.Relative pronoun: replace the clause preceding
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
-The whole class make questions for friends fine someone who used to.. If the answer isyes , you write his/her name in the column
-Work individually -Expected answer: 1.She has been playing the piano 3 years ago 2.He no longer plays tennis He used to play tennis 3.We have been invited to John party tonight 4.Sharah got lost which made her parents very worried. 5.In spite of being poor, the children was poor. 6.Look at these clouds! Its going to rain on the way. 7.Because of working harder, he will pass the exam -Ss give their comment s about the structures of sentences -Ss speak loudly and explanation
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
4.Although In spite of Though +S+V-> Despite + N/Ving Even though 5.Because + S+V -> because of + N/Ving 6.Used to + bare inf Be used to + Ving Be used to + Infinitive Be used for + V-ing III-MISTAKE CORRECTION 1.Im tired because Im not used to stay up late 2.Even though the extremely bad weather in the mountains, my friend decided not to cancel their trip across the mountain pass. 3.My car, that I have owned for five years , is a Ford. 4.If a drop of oil is placed in a glass of water, it would float to the top. 5.Unless we work harder, we will finish on time 6.Is this the person whose you asked me about? 7.Lan was absent from class yesterday because of she was ill. 8.Although his illness , he managed to come to school
-Ss work individually and compare their answer with a friend -Ss give the correct answers -Expected answer: 1.to staying 2.In spite of 3.which 4.was replaced 5.If 6.whom 7.because 8.In spite of
IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8. V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook - Prepare REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH EXPERIENCES:
Period:53
REVIEW
Date of
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Class 10 10 10
teaching
I.Objectives: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8. II-Skill : Four skills III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts IV- procedure: 1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance. 2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar 3- New lesson: REVIEW: REPORTED SPEECH T Teachers activities Students activities PRESENTATION 1.Examples: a.I saw her on my wayto school -Ss retalk the ways to change yesterday he says to me directed speech into indirected ->He says to me he saw her on his speech way to school yesterday. -Distinguish two sentences b.I saw her on my wayto school yesterday he said -> He said he had seen her on herway to school the day before 2.Eliciting: *When verb: say tell in the present , present perfect or simple future, no -Listen to Ts eliciting change tense of verb in the reported clause * When verb : say , tell in the past , we change the tense of verb in the reported clause( to move one tense back) - change adv of time - change pronouns , adj possessive Ss work individually and then for suitably compare their answer with a friends PRACTICE : -Ss go to the board and write down I.Change these following sentences -The others check and correct into reported Speech mistakes 1. Ill see you tomorrow Note: * Change adv of time , place -> She said................................. 2. I met her about three months Directed speech indirected ago speech -> He told me................................. Here There
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
3. I must go out to post thisbetternow, Mum, he said -> He said ................................. 4. If you want to lose weight , you should eat less meat -> The doctor advised her................................. 5. We cannot finish th etest in forty five minutes ->They said................................. 6.My husband has gone on business -> Mary said ................................. 7. I am doing a business couse now -> She told me................................. 8.Mary said I canot go to the movie with you , John -> Mary said................................. II.Mistake correction 1.At the interview, they asked me when can you start work. 2.She wanted to know whether I have seen Paul recently 3.I asked Sean how to pronounce his name? 4.The teacher said to her students how many people there were in their class. 5.He asked me how long had I been waiting for him
Before Last week Next week Now This These Today Tomorrow yesterday
Ago/earlier The week before The next week Then That Those That day The next day The day before The previous day I He/she You Me We They My His/her Yours truly, our My me Their Him/her
IV-Consolidation:- Retell all grammatical points from U7 to U8. V-Homework - Do all exercises again and do more in workbook - Prepare REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Period:54
REVIEW
Class 10 10 10 I.Objectives: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8. II-Skill : Four skills III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts IV- procedure: 1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance. 2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar 3- New lesson: REVIEW: CONDITIONAL SENTENCES T Teachers activities Students activities Date of teaching Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 1.Real conditional sentences a.Future possible If + S+V(simple present), S+ will +V-bare inf b.habitual If + S+V(simple present), S+ V(simple present) 2.Present unreal conditional sentences If + S+V(simple past), S+ would/could+Vbare inf Be-> were 3.Past unreal conditional sentences If + S+V(past perfect), S+ would/could+have +Vpp 4.If clause -> unless * negative -> affirmative(main clause doesnt change) Ex: If you dont study hard, youll fail in the exam -> Unless you study hard, youll fail in the exam *Affirmative -> Affirmative ( Main clause -> reverse) Ex: If I have time . Ill help you -> Unless I have time , I wont help you 5.As if and as though * Real in present S+V(present) + as if /as though +S+V( present) * Unreal in present S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past) * Unreal in the past S+V(past) + as if /as though +S+V( past perfect) PRACTICE WORD FORM 1.If I (know )........his telephone number . Id give it to you 2.Hecould get a job easily if he (have ) ........ a degree. 3.Henry talks to hisdog as if it (understand ) ........ him
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
-Ss listen and give out examples Ex: If I have money, I will buy new car. Ex: Ann usually walks to school if she has enough time Ex: If you went to the post office, I would meet you Ex: If we hadnt attended the course , we would have failed the exam -Ss pay attention to structures -Give more examples
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
4.If she (not hurry) ........, she may be late 5.Water ( not run ) ........down hill if there were not gravity 6.He looked tired as if he ( work ) ........very hard 7.If you ( turn ) ........out the light , we shall be in the dark. 8.He might get fat if he (stop) ........smoking 9.I ( accept) ........ if they invite me to the party REWRITING SENTENCES: 1.Alan always ate breakfast , he wouldnot overeat at lunch -> If........................................................................ ..... 2.The wind is blowing hard , so I wont take the boat out for a ride. -> If........................................................................ ..... 3.We dont visit our parents very often because they live so far away -> If........................................................................ ..... 4.I cant look the word up because I havenot got a dictionary. -> If........................................................................ ..... 5.Nick cant find the way because he hasnot got a map -> If........................................................................ .....
Ss work individually and then compare their answer with a friends -Ss go to the board and write down -The others check and correct mistaks
IV-Consolidation: Ask Ss to retalk the grammatical points in this lesson V-Homework EXPERIENCES:
-Do more exercises in work book - Prepare REVIEW 5
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Period:55 Date of teaching
REVIEW
Class 10
10 10 I.Objectives: Helping Ss revise the grammatical points from U1 to U8. II-Skill : Four skills III- Teaching aids: text book, copies, handouts IV- procedure: 1-Settlement: Greeting the class & checking students attendance. 2-Checking: Asking Ss to answer about grammar 3- New lesson: REVIEW: EXERCISES T Teachers activities Students activities
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
PRONUNCIATION I -Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others 1.a.around b.mouse c.count d.country 2.a.mechanic b.achievement c.chemistry d.school 3.a.cut b.fun c.pull d.button 4.a.camera b.famous c.glad d.family 5.a.seat b.leave c.increase d.ready II-Stress: 6.a.computer b.important c.village d.condition 7.a.television b.community c.atmosphere d.damage 8.a.persuade b.relax c.research d.export MULTIPLE CHOICE 1.Yesterday , when I ........at the station , the train........for 15 minutes a. arrived/ had left b.arrived /left c.had arrived /left d.arrived/ has left 2.Would you mind........me hand with these bags? a. give b.to give c .giving d.to giving 3.When I was a child I........fishing with my father on Sunday morning. a. went b.had gone c.used to go d. was used to going 4.Marie Curie harboured the dream of a ........career which was impossible for a woman at that time. a. scientist b. scientific c. science d. scientifically 5.This computer isnot capable ........running this software. a.on b.of c.in d.for 6.Students for ........English is a secon language should consider taking the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Ss work individually and then compare their answer with a friends -Ss go to the board and write down -The others check and correct mistaks * Expected answer pronunciation 1.d 2.b 3.c 4.b 5d 6.c 7.b 8.d
multiple choice 1.a 2.c 3.c 4.b 5.b 6.b 7.c
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
course. a. who b. whom c.that d.whose 7.If I ........John tonight , I ........him my plans a.saw/told b.will see/will tell c.see/will tell d.will see/tell MISTAKE CORRECTION 1.Even though the extremely bad weather in the mountains , my friends decided not to cancel their trip across the mountain pass 2.Have the play already started when you got to the theater? 3.My car, that I have owned for five years, is a Ford. 4.The installation of the new computer systerm will completed by next month 5.She wanted to know if I saw Paul resently
mistake correction 1.Even though-> Despite, In spite of 2.Have -> Had 3.that-> which 4.will completed->will complete 5.saw-> had seen
EXPERIENCES:
practice
PRONUNCIATION I -Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the others 1.a.around b.mouse c.count d.country 2.a.mechanic b.achievement c.chemistry d.school 3.a.cut b.fun c.pull d.button 4.a.camera b.famous c.glad d.family 5.a.seat b.leave c.increase d.ready II-Stress: 6.a.computer b.important c.village d.condition 7.a.television b.community c.atmosphere d.damage 8.a.persuade b.relax c.research d.export MULTIPLE CHOICE 1.Yesterday , when I ........at the station , the train........for 15 minutes a. arrived/ had left b.arrived /left
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
c.had arrived /left d.arrived/ has left 2.Would you mind........me hand with these bags? a. give b.to give c .giving d.to giving 3.When I was a child I........fishing with my father on Sunday morning. a. went b.had gone c.used to go d. was used to going 4.Marie Curie harboured the dream of a ........career which was impossible for a woman at that time. a. scientist b. scientific c. science d. scientifically 5.This computer isnot capable ........running this software. a.on b.of c.in d.for 6.Students for ........English is a secon language should consider taking the course. a. who b. whom c.that d.whose 7.If I ........John tonight , I ........him my plans a.saw/told b.will see/will tell c.see/will tell d.will see/tell MISTAKE CORRECTION 1.Even though the extremely bad weather in the mountains , my friends decided not to cancel their trip across the mountain pass 2.Have the play already started when you got to the theater? 3.My car, that I have owned for five years, is a Ford. 4.The installation of the new computer systerm will completed by next month 5.She wanted to know if I saw Paul resently
Final first term test 1

Name:................................. Class:10... Subject: English
Mark
Teacher's comments
I.Pronunciation :
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
1. a. read 2. a. picture 3. a. pity 4. a. shoot 5. a. spend
b. teach b. sunburnt b. children b. book b. paid
c. dead c. excursion c. finger c. food c. men
d. sleep d. nurse d. blind d. smooth d. can
II.Vocabulary and structure : Choose the best answer: 6.My parents ..tomorrow to stay with me for a few days. a. are coming b. come c. will have come d. is coming 7. Hue is famous for its __________________spots. a. beautiful b. beautify c. beautifully d. beauty 8.Marie,.. I met at the party, caked me last night. a. that b. whose c. which d. who 9. He got bad marks _____________________his laziness. a. because b. in spite of c. although d. because of 11.The street is very noisy, makes sleeping difficult. a. it b. what c. that d. which 12.Fax machine send or receive letter quickly. a.is used for b. used to c. is used to d. used for 13.When I arrived the theatre, the play .. I missed the first part. a. had started b. started c. was starting d. has started 14. A(n) ______________ person can't hear any kind of sound. a. unemployed b. blind c. injured d. deaf 15.What programme is ____________ VTV3 _____________7:00? a. at / in b. on / at c. on / on d. in / in 16. Now we don't go to school on foot as we ________________. a. used to b. did c. had been d. was 17. Some of the more time - consuming jobs can now be done by machines. a. odd b. taking little time c. taking much time d. not affected by time 18. What ________________when you met her yesterday? a. did she do b. she did c. has she done d. was she doing 19. My aunt has talent in _______________ and she has won many prizes. a. photograph b. photography c. photogenic d.photographic 20. The little girl is helping ____________cross the street. a. the rich b. the young c. the poor d. the blind III-Reading: Read the text and answer the questions below:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Almost a hundred thousand people were killed and half a million homes destroyed as a result of an earthquake in Tokyo in 1923. The earthquake began a minute before noon when the people of Tokyo were cooking their midday meals. Thousands of stoves were overturned as soon as the earth began to shake. As a result, small fires broke out everywhere and quickly spread. It was impossible to use fire fighting equipment because most of the water pipes had burst. Consequently, over ninety per cent of the damage was caused by fire rather than by the collapse of buildings. If the earthquake had occurred at night while people were sleeping, fewer people would have died. 1. Where and when did the earthquake happen? ... 2. How many people were killed? ... 3. What were people doing when the earthquake happened? ... 4. Why was it impossible to use fire fighting equipment? . 5. What caused most of the damage, the fire or the collapse of buildings? IV-Writing: A. Put the verbs in bracket into the correct form. 1) I (take).......................... a walk if the weather were nice. 2) We would buy a house if we (have).................... enough money. 3) If I (be)...................... you, I (tell) Brian the truth. 4) If I (be not) .................. tired, I would go to the movie with you. 5) If I (not have) ....................... class today, I would go shopping. 6) I dont understand that sentence. If I (understand) that sentence, I (explain) . it to you. B.Write the sentences using the words given : 1. Marie Curie / born / November 7th,1867 / Warsaw ->.. 2. She/want / become / sciencetist. ->.. 3. Elvis Presley/ be / famous singer / America / 20th century. ->..
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Final first term test 2

Subject: English
Name:.................................. Class:10... Mark
Teacher's comments
I-Pronunciation: 1. a. sure b. picture c mature. d. adventure 2. a. ruby b. unlucky c. punish d. sunburnt 3. a. dine b. line c. combine d. routine 4. a. reading b. death c. scream d. cleaning 5. a.chatting b.chemistry c. change d.children II-Vocabulary and Grammar: 1. What is your surname ? a. first name b. second name c. nickname d. family name 2. Ann is interested in .young children. a. teaching b. teaches c. to teach d. teach 3. Peter is learning English at the moment. He often . English 3 periods every week. a. is learning b. has learned c learns. d. will learn 4. .. Peter leave for London ? -Two weeks ago. a. Why has b. Where did c. When did d. What did 5. Marie Curie extremely hard when she was a student. a. worked b. works c. was working d. had been worked 6. We .. in this town for a long time. We here sixteen years ago. a. had been/ come b. have been / came c. were / came d. are / came 7. He twenty chichkens last week, now he .. them up to sell. a. had bought/ fed b. buys / feeds c. bought / is feeding d. was buying / fed 8. Before the plane takes off, the passengers to fasten their seat belt. a. are told b. are telling c .told d. tell 9. Can you show me ________________machine? a. how using b. how to use c. how use d. how you used 10. Now we don't go to school on foot as we ________________. a. used to b. did c. had been d. was 11. Some of the more time - consuming jobs can now be done by machines. a. odd b. taking little time c. taking much time d. not affected by time
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
12. What ________________when you met her yesterday? a. did she do b. she did c. has she done d. was she doing 13. It was hot all the time, ________________was a great pity. a. which b. what c. that d. who 14. They ______________friends since they ____________________at high school. a. were/ have been b. have been/ were c. had been/ have been d.were/ were 15. The little girl is helping ____________cross the street. a. the rich b. the young c. the poor d. the blind III-Reading: Read the passage and answer the questions: Disneyland celebrated its 50th birthday on Sunday. Thousands of fans and celebrities gathered at what Disney calls the happiest place on Earth for a giant party. Walt Disney opened the worlds first large-scale theme park on July 17, 1955. It started a whole new world of fantasy and family fun. An amazing 515 million fun seekers have since visited Disneyland. Walt Disneys idea has been copied around the world by thousands of others, all wanting to make money from the riches in this money-spinning industry. From its small beginnings, Disney has mushroomed into a global entertainment empire. It has become one of the most famous and well known bands in history. It has created everything from blockbuster movies to childrens stationery. Theme parks have spread across the world in Paris, Japan and very soon Hong Kong. It is almost impossible to walk around any city and not see Mickey Mouse in some shape or form. However, while the idea of providing pleasure has not changed, park admission prices have: the one-dollar ticket in 1955 is now $56. 1. When did Walt Disney open the worlds first large- scale theme park? 2. How many fun seekers have visited Disneyland? 3.What has it created? 4. What was name of a famous mouse in Disneys films? 5. What is the price of admission ticket now? IV-Writing: A.Put the verbs in parentheses into the correct active or passive voice 1. Last night my favorite program________________ (interrupt) by a special news bulletin.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. When I______________ (arrive) at the airport yesterday, I______________ (meet) by my cousin and a couple of friends. 3. Kim______________ (write) this composition last week. That one _____________ (write) by Phi. 4. I dont have my bicycle today. Its with the repairman. It______________ (repair) right now. 5. Someone has bought the small lot behind my house and a new house_______________ (build) on it next year. B.Write the sentences using the words given : 1.Marie Curie / born / November 7th,1867 / Warsaw ->.. 2 .She/want / become / sciencetist. ->.. .Elvis Presley/ be / famous singer / America / 20th century. ->..
UNIT 9: UNDERSEA WORLD

I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will bw able toL - Have information about the undersea world. - Knowledge about the oceans and the undersea world. II. Language focus: 1. Grammar: - Should. - Conditional type 2
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning undersea world like: whale, jellyfish, shark,life span, - Words and phrases about protecting environment. III. Skill: - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through vocabulary Matching and Table completion exercises. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 3 - Aim: Sts get used to the topic. + Networks: - Sts are required to work in groups of 3 or - Work in groups of 3-4 students 4 to make a list of words related to the names of the animals in the sea in written - Give the lists to the teacher form. - The group with the longest list will be the winner. 2. Before you read - Work in pairs and do the work - Aim: -Prepare information and orally. 12 vocabularies for the topic. - Some sts report. + Work with a partner 1: + Pa'cific ocean: Thi bnh - Ask sts to look at the map and give dng Vietnamese names for the oceans on the + At'lantic ocean: i ty map. dng - Allow sts to discuss in pairs in 2 minutes. + 'Indian ocean: n dng + 'Arctic ocean: Bc bng - Get feedback and give remarks. dng + An'tarctic ocean + Work with a partner 2: ( southern ocean): Bin - Sts are required to do in the same way as nam cc. in work with a partner 1 to name the sea - Listen and copy down. animal in each picture. - Ask some sts to report. - Do as they have done in the - Listen and give remarks. previous part + Vocabulary: - Some sts report. - Provide the sts with new words/phrases: + Picture1: Seal + Gulf(n): Vnh + Picture2: Jellyfish + challenge(v): thchthc + Picture3: Turtle + Subma'rine(n): Tu ngm + Picture4: Shark + 'organism(n): c th - Self- correct + Biodi'versity(n): s a dng sinh hc + at stake(phr) : C nguy c
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
20
tuyt chng = in danger - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask the sts to repeat it. - Leave the sts 1 minute to self-practise reading the words. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class - Listen and help the sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: - Aims: Read the passage for information to do the tasks. + Set the scene: - You are going to read a passage about undersea world. Read it and then do the tasks that follow. + Task 1:Fill in each space with a suitable from the box. - Ask sts to read the passage and do task 1. - Sts are required to compare their results with their partners. - 5 sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). - Listen and help sts to do the task correctly. + Task 2: Answering Questions: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage again and answer the questions in task 2. - Require sts to underline the information that supports the answers. - Sts are required to compare their answers with another pair. - Ask 5-6 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class (1 st / 1 time).
- Listen and then copy down - Listen and repeat. - Read these words silently. - Soms sts read these words aloud and others listen. - Self-correct.
- Listen to the teacher. - Read the passage and then do the task. - Share their answer with their partners. - Some sts report. 1. tiny 2. investigate 3. gulf 4. biodiversity 5. samples - Work in pairs to ask and answer. - Compare their answer with other pairs. - Some pairs report. 1. 75% 2. They do that by using modern devices 3. They bring samples to the scientists to study 4. We can learn about the temperature, depth, and the
- Give correct answers.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
4. After you read: - Aims: Give the summary of the passage. - Sts are required to work in pairs to fill in each numbered space with a word/phrase in the box. - 8 sts represent by reading aloud the answers. - Listen and help sts to do their task well. . Homework: - Learn the summary of the reading passage.
marine population 5. They are : + the bottom depending + current independing + tiny organism - Work in pairs to do the task. - 8 sts report. 1. three-quarters 2. mysterious 3. modern 4. discovery 5. plants and animals 6. huge 7. biodiversit 8. closely connected - Others listen
EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students know about some actions to protect the oceans. - Students can talk about the protection of the oceans.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
II. Skill:
- Speaking about undersea world. - Reading and ordering the importance to protect the oceans. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework - checking: 7 - Ask sts to write the new words on the - One student write the new words board. on board. - Ask others to answer the questions of - Others answer the questions. the reading passage. 2. Before you speak: 13 Aims:to focus sts on the topic and introduce the new words and phrases used to talk about the protection of the oceans. - Listen to the T. + Task 1: There are some actions that should be taken to protect our oceans. Put the actions in order of importance and say what we should or shouldnt do. - Write down the new words and - Ask sts to look at the task and give sts practise reading them. some new words: - rubbish (n): rc ri - pollute (v): gy nhim - dispose (v) of sth: vt b - 'herbicides (n): thuc dit c - Work in pairs to do the task. - 'pesticide (n): thuc tr su - Ask sts to read the new words aloud. - Ast sts to work in pairs, using should or shouldnt to put the actions in order of importance and talk about these actions. - Go around to help sts if necessary. - T. may give sts some suggested phrases: - Sts may answer: I think that What do you think of action( f ) is the most important How do you feel about + V- ing because if we learn all we can know Whats your opinion of about the oceans we will Well, I think... understand their values and try to In my opinion we should..... protect them. - Ask some sts to give their opinions. 3. While you speak 15 Aims: Sts practise discussing the consequences of the threats to the - read the sentences and find the oceans and some solutions. new words. - Ask sts to skim the sentences in Task 2 and find the new words. - Explain some new words: - Listen and take notes.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
hunt (v ) explosive ( n) spill ( v ) tanker ( n ) - Work in group of three or four. -- Ask sts to work in groups of three or four to discuss the consequences of the threat to our oceans listed in Task 2 and offer some solutions. - Give sts some suggestions: Threats Consequences Solutions 1. Beaches are filled with plastic bags. - polluted water - place plastic bags in proper dustbins 2.Whales are hunted for food. - extinct/ disappear - not hunt or sell whale products 3.Explosives are used to catch fish. - a lot of fish died - be banned. 4. Oil is filled from tanks - polluted water -clean the sea water/punish captain. - Some sts report their opinions in - Go around to help sts if necessary. front of the class. 4.After you speak: Aims: Sts report what they have discussed. Task 3: Report to the class what your group has discussed. - Ask some representatives to report their groups opinions in front of the - Others listen and give remarks. class. - Listen and ask others to listen to give their opinions. 5. Homework: - Write a passage about the threats to our oceans and the solutions.
EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

I. Objectives: - Sts know about the whales: how large they are, what they eat, where they live, and if they are in danger. - Parts of the world - Vocabulary on sea animals. II. Skill: - Listening: choose True/ False statements, answer the questions - Speaking: - Talk about whales III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tape, pictures of whales and other sea animals. IV. Procedures: T 7 Teachers activities 1. Homework checking: Students activities One st presents. Others listen and give remarks.
One sts talks about what people should do to protect the oceans. 2. Before you listen: 10 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. a. Focus sts on the picture of a whale - Discuss in groups. and ask sts to answer the following questions: - What animal is the largest in the world? - What do you know about whales? Some sts stand up and give their
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Why do people think whales are not fish? - Why do people keep hunting whales? - Ask some sts to give their answer. b. Introduces some new words - 'mammal (n): the animal that raise the young on milk - whaling (n): hunting whales - krill(n): tiny shellfish found in the seas (whales feed on krill) - mig'rate(v): to move from one place to another according to season - conser'vation (n): taking care of st, the prevention of loss, damage..... - feeding / bearing ground (n): the place where a species of animal find food/ give birth. - an/a/the increase/ decrease in st(phr): - International whaling Commission: an organization responsible for the number of whales hunted. - measure(n): an action taken to achieve a purpose - Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. - Ask sts to refer to the map of the world in the textbook (p. 94) and revise parts of the world, the oceans and discuss where there are cold waters. 3. While you listen: 18 + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and marking True/ False statements. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to a talk about whales. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the statements given and guess if they are true or false. - Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the right column to indicate their answer and underline the false information. T plays the tape twice.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
answer. Sts copy the words and phrases.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud. - Look at the map, recall parts of the world, the oceans and discuss where there are cold waters.
- Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to guess if the statements are true or false. - Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. F. It's the largest animal on earth. 2. T 3. T 4. F. They are in danger because some people are still killing them for food
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to compare their answer in 5. T pairs. - Check their answer and then - Check sts answer. correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims:Sts practise listening for specific information by answering given questions. - Ask sts to have a look at the questions in the textbook and read them in pairs and make sure they understand them. T encourages sts guess the answer to the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the tape once or twice again to answer the questions. Sts can note down important information - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer.
- Work in pairs to read the questions and try to answer them. - Listen and do the task. - Gives their answer. 1. It is about 30 metres in length and over 200 tons in weight. 2. It is because there is a lot of krill - their favourite food 3. They are the cold waters in the North and the South of the Pacific Ocean and the Atlantic Ocean. 4. Heavy hunting. 5. They have asked the International Waling Commission to stop most whaling. 6. If we didn't take any measures to protect whales, this kind of animal would disappear forever - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. - Work in pairs to talk about whales.
- Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. 4. After you listen: 10 - Ask sts to work in pairs and tell each other about the whales using the - Two sts present. following information: largest- 30 -200 -most intelligent - cold water - North - South- Pacific - Atlantic - krill - in danger - hunting - The
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Eskimo - not protect - disappear. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask two sts to present in front of the whole class. 1 - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: Write a short paragraph about the whale EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students can write a paragraph to describe information from a table.

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Information about the sperm whale and the dolphin. II. Skill: Speaking: - read the sample paragraph. - work in pairs to find information to complete the table . - write a paragraph to describe the facts and figures provided in the table. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5 - Ask one st to talk about whales. - Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. - Listen to their friend and give - Check and give remarks. remarks. 2. Before you write: - Listen to the teacher. - Aims:to get sts to read the sample 17 paragraph and to help them to prepare vocabulary and information before they write. + Task 1: - Introduce the situation. - Explain some new words: - Listen to the teacher carefully. + sperm whale (n): a kind of whale that is hunted for an oily substance in its - Copy these words into theit head. notebooks. + 'carnivore (n): an animal that eats meat + squid (n): mc ng + ges'tation period (n): the process of carrying the young baby inside the mother's body. + life span (n): the period from birth to - Listen to the teacher and then death read these words in chorus and + en'trapment (n): s mc by individually. + 'offspring (n): con ci - Read the paragraph in pairs and - Ask sts to listen to the teacher and repeat , then write these words into their do the task. notebooks. - Share their answer with their - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the friends. paragraph and then complete the table - Present their ideas. that follows. + Range and habitat: all oceans. - Move round to help if necessary. Prefer the waters with high squid - Ask sts to compare their ideas with populations. other pairs. + Size: - Draw a table on the board and ask some sts to go to the board and complete Male: 18 m in length, 54,000 kg in
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
the table.
weight Female: 12 m in length, 17,000 kg in weight. .................................. - Listen to the teacher. - Work in pairs to read the table and try to understand the information.
- Look at the board and give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to work in pairs in 3 minutes to read the second table with some information about the dolphin. - Move round to help if necessary. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing a paragraph 15 that describes the facts and figures about the dolphin.. - Ask sts to use the information in the table and write a paragraph about the dolphin basing on the information in the table. - Let sts write in 10 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write: 7 Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) Dolphins are not fish. They are mamals that live in the water. Dolphins among the most intelligent on Earth. Although they can be found in all oceans in the world, dolphins prefer coastal waters and bays. The size of dolphins varies greatly. The smallest dolphin is just about 50kg in weight and 1.2 metres in length while the largest o9ne can weigh up to 8,200 kg and is 10 metres long. Dolphins are carnivores and they eat mostly fish. A female dolphin gives birth to one calf every two years after a gestation period of eleven to twelve months...........
5. Homework: - Part D ( page 67- workbook)

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /i/, /e/ and /u/ correctly. - Students revise the use of "should" and conditional sentence type 2. II. Language focus: 1. Grammar: - Should. - Conditional type 2 2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning undersea world like: whale, jellyfish, shark,life span, - Words and phrases about protecting environment. III. Skills: - Pronunciation: /i/, /e/ and /u/ . - Should. - Conditional sentence type 2. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to read the text about the - One st read the text aloud in front blue whale. of the whole class. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation: - Aims: to introduce three sounds 10 /i/,/e/ and /u/ and help sts to practise
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
these sounds. a. Write three sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 101 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /i/, sound /e/ and sound /u/ . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: 28 Aims: to revise the use of " should" and conditional sentence type 2 and have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3. a. Should: - Ask sts to tell the T the use of "should"
- Write down three sounds. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. /i/ /e/ /u/ here pair poor dear chair sure clear square tour ........................... - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /i/ /e/ /u/ beer where sure dear wear poor ............................... - Read the sentences.
- " Should " is a modal verb that is used to give advice. - Some sts give examples: eg: You should get up early in the morning. People shouldn't hunt whales.
- Ask sts to give examples with "should" and "shouldn't". - Do Ex 1. - Some sts sts report their work - Ask sts to do EX1. sentence by sentence. + Exercise 1: 2. You should look for another job. - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the 3. He shouldn't go to bed so late. task. 4. You should take a photograph.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. - Introduce the use of " I think/ I don't think ...... should ..."by using some examples: eg: Joana and Andrew are planning to go skiing this weekend. You think it's a bad idea. You; I think you should stay at home. I don't think you should go skiing thid weekend. - Explain why " I don't think ....... should...." is preferred to " I think ....... shouldn't.........". - Ask sts to do EX2. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. b. Conditional sentence type 2: - Review the form and the use of conditional sentence type 2 by giving some examples: eg: If my grandfather were still alive, he would be 100 today. If I had a lot of money, I would lend you some. - Ask sts to read the examples and point out the form as well as the use of conditional sentence type 2. + Note: " were" is used with all persons. - Ask some sts to give examples.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
5. She shouldn't use her car so much. 6. He should put some pictures on the wall. - Look at the examples and listen to the teacher.
- Do this EX individually. - Some sts report. 2. I think smoking should be banned, especially in restaurants. 3. I don't think you should go out this evening. 4. I think he should resign. - Listen to their friends and their teacher.
- Read the examples and point out the form and the use of conditional sentence type 2: + Form: If- clause , main clause S + V( P.S) , S + would + V + Use: an unreal situation at present or in the future.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to do EX3. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to do the task in pairs. - Go round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to read sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. 2
- Do Ex 3 in pairs. - Some sts report. 3. would take 7. pressed 4. refused 8. wouldn't be 5. wouldn't get 9. didn't come 6. closed down 10. borrowed ............................
5. Homework - Part B ( page 54 - workbook) EXPERIENCES:
UNIT 10: CONSERVATION

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
I. Objectives: - Students improve their knowledge about conservation. II.Language focus: 1.Grammar: -Passive voices 2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning conservation. III. Skill: - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through Matching and True or False, identifying the main idea exercise. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 3 + Network.. - Ask sts to work in groups of 3 or 4. - Work in groups to discuss. - Ask sts to give a list of the animals which are in danger of extinction. - Some sts report the list in front of - After 3 minutes, the group which has the class. the longest list will be the winner. 2. Before you read: - Sts are required to answer the - Think of the answers. 10 questions given in the part: 1. Have you ever visited a zoo or a - Students give answers orally. forest? - others listen 2. What animals are you interested in? Why? 3. Do we need to protect animals and forests? + For each question, 2-3 sts are required to answer orally. + Vocabulary: - Copy down these words into their - Provide the students with some new notebooks. words/phrases +Variety(n): a large number of different kinds. + Species(n): = kind, type. - Listen and repeat + Eliminate(v): = disappear, - Practise reading these words by themselves. remove + Destruction(n) destroy(v) - Some sts read these words again aloud (1 student/ 1 time) destructive(Adj): s ph hu. + Hydroelectric dam(n): p thu in. + Circulation(n): S chuyn ng. circulate(v) + Overnight(Adv): in a very short period - Work individually.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
of time - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class - Listen and help sts to read the 20 words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: + Task 1: Matching. - Ask sts to read the passage independently and match the words or phrases in A with their meaning in B. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in the context of the reading. - Call on some sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. - Get feedback and give correct answers. + Task 2: True or False. - Ask sts to read the passage more carefully and decide whether the statements are true(T) or false(F). Correct the false information. - Ask sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that help sts to find the correct answers. - 6 - 7 sts are required to give answers in front of the class(1 st/ 1answer).
- Try their best to do the task. - Ask some sts to report. 1.c 2.a 3.d 4.b -Listen and self-correct the exercise. - Sts do the work individually
- Highlight or underline the important information. - 6-7 students do orally while others watch 1. T 2. T 3. T 4. T 5. F( two last sentences of paragraph B) 6. F(last sentence of paragraph C) - Self-correct the work
- Listen and help sts to do the exercise correctly + Task 3: Main ideas. - Ask sts to work in groups of 3-4 to choose the most suitable idea for each paragraph. - Call on some representatives to read their choice for each paragraph in front of the class. - Get feedback and give correct answers. 4. After you read: Questions - Answers
- Work in groups of 3-4 students orally - Some sts report. A.3 B. 4 C. 2 - Self-correct
- Work in pairs orally. 1. We wouldn't be able to use many plants to treat various dangerous
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to work in pairs to give answers to the questions. - Go round to help the students with their work. - 3-4 sts are required to give answers to one question orally in front of the class( 1 st/1 time). - Listen and help sts to give correct answers. 5. Homework: - Ask sts to write a paragraph of about 60 words on the sequence of losing forest, how important water is, and what we should do for the future of our planet.
diseases. Animals wouldn't have a place to live in... 2. Mankind and most plants and animals can't survive without water... 3. We should stop polluting the environment and destroying plants and animals ......
EXPERIENCES:
Date: 02/01/2011 Period : 61 Date of Class teaching

Teacher: T Vn Bnh

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students know about the new kind of zoo. - Students can talk about the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo. II. Skill: Speaking - Asking and answering about the new kind of zoo. - Showing agreement or disagreement about the new kind of zoo. - Reporting on discussion results. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up 5 - Ask sts some questions: -Sts answer: Have you ever visited the zoo? Yes, I have/ No, never What did you see there? I saw many animals there Where are all the animals in the zoo? They are in the cages. - Introduce the new lesson: We are going to discuss the new kind of zoo where wild animals can live in their natural habitat. 2.Before you speak: 10 Aims: Sts can discuss the questions about the features of the new kind of zoo. + Task 1: Read the paragraph and answer the questions - Read two paragraphs silently. - Ask sts to read through the two paragraphs. - Give sts some new words: - Listen and take notes. + sensitive (adj): be affected by slight changes, influences: nhy cm + imprison (v): put or keep in prison: b t + reconstruct (v): build again + breed (v) : gy ging , nhn - Practise reading the new words . ging. + reintroduce (v): put a species of - Work in pairs. animal or plant back into a former - Some sts present in front of the habitat: a tr v mi trng sng t class. 1. They are opened to help nhin endangered species develop. - Ask sts to read the new words orally - Ask sts to work in pairs to discuss the 2. The animals are not kept in cages. They can live in their questions in two paragraphs.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Go around to help sts . natural environment. - Ask some sts to present their answers. 20 - Get feedback and give remarks. 3. While you speak: Aims: Sts can show their agreement or disagreement about the new kind of zoo and discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo. - Listen to the T. + Task 2: Put a tick in the right box and share your ideas with a partner. - Before sts do the task T elicits some structures for asking opinions and giving the opinions ... Asking for opinions Giving opinions What do you think of ...? Do you think......? Do you agree with ....? I think ... I dont think ... In my opinion .. Showing agreement Showing disagreement I agree with .... Yes , I think you are right. Exactly. I dont really think so. Yes, ..but... I would doubt that .. - Ask sts to work individually to do the task - Ask sts to work in pairs to share their ideas. - Go around to observe and help sts - Ask some sts to talk about their ideas. 10 - Listen and give feedback. 4. After you speak: + Task 3:Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo using the cues below. - Ask sts to work in group to discuss the - Some sts present in front of the
- Work individually. - Work in pairs to share the ideas . - Say their opinions aloud. I think it would be better for animals if they live in the zoo of new kind because they may have better food. ................................................ - Listen to the teacher. - Work in groups of three of four to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
advantages and disadvantages of the new kind class: of zoo. "There are some advantages of the Advantages new kind of zoo. Firstly, the Disadvantages animals can live in a better environment and are safer than - the conditions the animals are in when they are in nature......" - Listen to their friends as well as - the animals that people can visit to the teacher. - the money spent on rescontructions of the animals natural environment - the dangers that keepers may have - Go around to help sts if necessary. 3 - Take notes of Ss mistakes for later correction. Aims: Sts can report on their discussion results 5. Homework ( 2 minutes ) Write a paragraph of the report that they have discussed in the class. EXPERIENCES:
Date: 02/01/2011
Teacher: T Vn Bnh

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
LESSON 3 : LISTENING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Sts know how a forest fire starts and what campers have to remember to do to protect the forests. * Language: - Some set expressions - Vocabulary on forest II. Skill: - Listening: order events ,mark True/False, detect sentences. - Speaking: - Discuss how a forest fire may start and what every camper ought to remember. III. Teaching aids: - Textbook , tape, pictures of whales and other sea animals. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - One st tell the whole class about the Other sts listen to their friend and advantages and disadvantages of a zoo give remarks of the new kind. - Listen and give remarks. 2. Before you listen: 10 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. a. Divide sts into 3 groups and ask each to discuss one of the following - Work in groups and discuss the questions: questions. a. How destructive can a forest fire be? b. What can cause a forest fire? - One st from each group stands up c. Do you know any famous forest and gives their answer. fire? Are there any forest fires in Vietnam? Which countries have many forest fires every year? - Ask some sts to give their answer. b. Introduce the topic of the listening - Copy down the words and phrases text into their notebooks. - Introduce some new words/ expressions - campfire (n): the fire made on at
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
camping trip. - forester (n): the person whose job is to take cares of the forest. - a heap of (n): a lot of thing on top of one another. - spread (v): to move to other places very quickly] - leave sb/ st doing: leave sb/st when it/he is Ving - Read the words again and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again and give remarks 3. While you listen: 25 + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and numbering the event in the correct order. - Introduce sts that they are going to listen to the tape about forest fires and they have to number the given statements in the order they hear. - Ask sts to read the statements in pairs and make sure that they understand them. - Play the tape twice and ask sts to put the number in the right box to indicate the order of the events - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Check sts answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims: Sts practise listening and marking True/ false. - Ask sts to listen to the tape again and decide whether the given statements are true or false. - Ask sts to read the statements to see if they understand them. - Play the tape once and ask sts to tick to the box to indicate T/ F statement
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud. - Listen to the T.
- Read the statements in pairs and try to guess the order of the events. - Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. Key: 3 - 2 - 5 - 1 - 4 - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
- Listen to the T. - Read the statements in pairs and try to do the task. - Listen to the tape / the teacher and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Check their answer say it aloud,
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
and underline the false information and then correct their work if they - Ask sts to compare their answer in have the wrong answer. pairs. - Check sts answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 3: Aims: Sts practise listening and ticking - Read the sentences and find out the sentences they hear. the difference between sentences in - Ask sts to have a look at the sentences each pair. given to see if they understand them and compare the sentences in each pair - Listen to the tape and do the task. to see the difference between them. - Ask sts lo listen to the tape again and - Give their answer. tick in the box to indicate the sentences Key: 1. B 2. A 3. A they hear. - Check their answer and then - Play the tape once. correct their work if they have the - Check sts answer. wrong answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the - Work in groups to discuss. correction. 4. After you listen: 8 - Ask sts to work in groups and use the information in Task 1 and 2 to discuss the following questions: - How can a forest fire start? - What does every camper have to - One/ two sts present. remember not to cause a forest fire? - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask one or two sts to retell the story in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: 2 Write a short paragraph about what people can do to protect forest from fires. EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-

I. Objectives: - Students can write a letter of invitation. * Language: - Language used to write an informal letter. - Structures: "Let's ...... "," Shall we.....?", etc . II. Skill: Writing: - read the sentences in task 1 and the incomplete letters in task 2. - work in pairs to match the halves of the sentences in task 1 and to fill each blank in these invitation letters. - write an invitation letter basing on the cues. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking :( 5 mins) 5 - Ask one st to talk about how a forest fire may start and what every camper ought to remember. - Listen to their friend and give - Ask other sts to listen to their friend and remarks. give remarks. - Check and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Before you write:( 20 mins) - Aims:to get sts to write out the 20 sentences by matching the first half in A with the most suitable half in B and then to use these sentences to fill the blanks in the invitation letters. + Task 1: - Ask sts to read the requirement of task - Listen to the teacher carefully. 1 carefully and then work in pairs to do the task. - Ask sts to pay attention to the meaning as well as the structure of the two halves. - Copy the structures into theit - Recall some structures so that sts can do notebooks. the task more easily. Shall we/ Can you/ Why don't you + Vinf...? - Do the task in pairs. Let's + V-inf. - Share their answer with their Would you like/ Are you free + tofriends.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
V.......? Do you feel like/ How about + Ving.......? - Ask sts to do in 4 minutes and move around to help if necessary. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the letters in pairs and to use the above expression to fill each blank. - Introduce some new words/phrases: + for a while: for a period of time + 'disco (n): a club or party where people dance with pop music + 'afterwards (adv): at a later time - Ask sts to listen to the teacher and repeat , then write these words into their notebooks. - Get sts to do the task in 5 minutes and then get feedback letter by letter. - Listen and give remarks 3. While you write:( 10 mins) - Aims: Sts practise writing an invitation 10 letter. - Ask sts to play the role of Nam's and to write a letter to Lam, inviting him to spend a weekend with him. - Let sts write in 8 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write:( 9 mins) 8 Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks
- Present their ideas. 1.c 2. f/h 3. a 5. h/f 6. d/g 7. e - Listen to the teacher.
4. g/d 8.b
- Work in pairs to read the letters and try to understand the content of the letters.
- Listen and repeat. - Copy the words/ phrases - Report their answer: 1.3/8 2.3/8 - 4/6 3. 2/5- 7 - Listen to the teacher.
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) "Dear Lam, We haven't met since oyu moved. And I miss you a lot. We are both having some days- off between the two terms soon. So if you haven't made any other plans why don't we spend a weekend together? Do you feel like visiting the forest near my grandparents' home again?It looks quite different now because very many young trees have been planted at the Trees Planting Festivals.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Do come if you find it possible and I'll make all the preparations then. Please give my love to your parents. Your friend,
5. Homework: ( 1min) - Part D (page 63- workbook). EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /b/ and /p/ correctly. - Students revise the passive voice. II.Language focus: 1.Grammar: -Passive voices 2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning conservation. III. Skill: - Pronunciation: /b/ and/p/ . - The passive voice. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Teacher's activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to read the letter they wrote at home aloud. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Check and give a mark. 2. Pronunciation: - Aims: to introduce two sounds / b / 10 and / p / and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds accurately. / b / : a voiced sound / p / : a voiceless sound - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and repeat. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 110 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound / b / and sound / p / . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: Aims: to revise the passive voice and 29 have sts do Ex1, EX 2 and EX3.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students' activities - One st reads his/her letter aloud aloud in front of the whole class. - Give remarks. - Listen to the teacher.
- Write down two sounds. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. /b/ /p/ bee pea ban pan bad Paul ........................... - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners.
- Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /b/ /p/ Bill Pat big pan black paper ............................... - Read the sentences.
- Listen to the teacher , read the example and tell the whole class
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ The passive voice: - Recall the form of the passive by giving an example: eg: Active: We clean this window every day. Passive: This window is cleaned every day. - Ask sts to pay attention to the sentence elements and to tell the T the difference between the active sentence and the passive sentence. - Ask sts to tell the T the form of the passive. + Note: Only transitive verbs are used in the passive. It is impossible to use verbs such as happen, sleep, stand ( intransitive verbs) or seem, feel ( intensive verbs) in the passive. - Ask sts to give some examples. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to do this exercise on the board. - Ask one st to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to read the requirement of Ex3 and then do the task in pairs. - Go round to conduct the activity.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
their ideas. + In the passive, the object of an active verb becomes the subject of the passive verb. + Form: S + V ( be + p.p )
- Listen to the teacher and take note. - Give examples.
- Some sts report. 1. were reported 2. are grown 3. be spoken 4. am not invited 5. are being built - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: 1. came.... had ( been) started .......... were 2. is standing........ is being photographed 3. Have the students been told 4. was being laid ...... decided 5. will ................ be planted - Listen to the teacher. - Read the requirement carefully. - Do Ex 3. EX3: 1. was organized 2. arrived 3. were met 4. taken 5. had been cleaned 6. had been
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask some pairs to read the dialouge. - Listen and give remarks. 1 5. Homework - Part B ( page 60workbook)
put 7. was excellent 9. made served
8. prepared 10. were
EXPERIENCES:
Date: 11/012011 Period : 65 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10
UNIT 11: NATIONAL PARKS

I. Objectives: - Students improve their knowledge about national parks . II. language focus: 1 . Grammar: -Conditional sentence: type . 2. Vocabulary:- Vocabulary concerning natural environment and conservation. III. Skill: - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the word in the passage that best suits each of the definitions and answering questions. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities 1. Before you read: Aims: to repare information and 12 vocabularies for the topic.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students activities
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to answer the question: Can you name some national - Listen and think of the question. parks in Vietnam and in the world? - Some sts answer: - Ask some sts to answer the question. Cuc Phuong National Park Bach Ma national Park. Nairobi National Park. - Listen and give remarks. Alaska National Park. - Introduce the reading text and provide sts with new words/phrases. + lo'cate(v): = to place (c v tr) + 'butterfly(n): an insect with very big wings that can fly(con - Listen and then copy down bm) + e'stablish(v): = to make/ build( thit lp) + hike(v): to walk for health +sur'vive(v): to be alive after accident( sng st )..... survival(n) + 'orphan(v): to be made parentless(m ci) orphanage(n) + Sub-tropical(Adj): cn nhit - Listen and repeat. - Read silently to self-practise. i + 'wilderness(n): = wild place( - Some sts read these words aloud and others listen. ni/ s hoang d) - Self-correct. + contami'nation(n) contaminate(v): to make something dirty/ polluted. - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practise reading the words. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class 20 - Listen and help sts to read the - Read the passages and do the task. words/phrases correctly. - Compare their results with their 2. While you read: parners. Aims: Read the passage for - Present their answer: information to do the tasks. 2. contain + Set the scene: 3. species - You are going to read the passages 4. survival
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
about The National Parks. Read them and then do the tasks that follow. + Task 1:Fill in each space with a suitable from the passages. - Ask sts to read the passages and do task 1. - Explain more about the definitions if necessary. - Sts are required to compare their results with their partners. - 5sts are required to do the task orally in front of the class (1 st/ 1 time). - Listen and help sts to do the task correctly. + Task 2: Answering Questions: - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passages again and answer the questions in task 2. - Require sts to underline the information from the passages that supports the answers. - Required sts to compare their answers with another pair. - Ask 6 - 7 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class (1 st/1 time).
5. sub-tropical 6. contamination - Listen to the T and correct if necessary. - Work in pairs to read the passages again and to ask and answer. - Underline the information from the passages. - Share their answer with other sts. - Some pairs report: 1.200 square km: 2. Because the rainy season is over. 3. They can learn about the habits of animals and how one species is dependent upon another for survival. 4. In the orphanage, orphaned and/ or abandoned animals are taken care of. Everglades National Park is endangered because of the toxic levels of chemicals in the water 5. If more chemicals are released into the water, plans and animals will die/ be killed/ destroyed. - Work in groups to talk about their choice. - Present his/her ideas. - Others listen
10 - Listen and give remarks. 3. After you read: Aims: to give the summary of the passage. - Sts are required to work in groups to give reasons for their choice from one of the three national parks in the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
reading passages. - One representative is required to give their talk orally in front of the class - Listen and help the students to do their task well.
4. Homework: - Complete the talk in written form. EXPERIENCES:
..

I. Objectives: - Students know about an excursion to Huong Pagoda. - Students can talk about an excursion and express their regrets. . Skills: - Matching sentences in column A with the coresponding consequences in column B. - Talking about an excursion. - Expressing the regrets. III. Teaching aids:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities 1. Warm-up: 3 - Ask sts the questions: - Have you have ever had a camping trip? - Tell me what you prepared for that trip? - Ask one or two sts. to answer. 2. Before you speak: 12 Aims:tofocus sts. on the topic and introduce the words and phrases used in the task. + Task 1: Matching Last week Ngas class went on an excursion to Huong Pagoda. Unfortunately, the excursion turned out to be a disaster. Most of the things they did went wrong. You are required to match the thing in column A with the coresponding consequences in column B . - Ask sts to read through the sentences in the two columns. - Give sts some new words or expressions: + food poisoning: ng c thc n + fine (n ): cash paid as punishment ( tin pht) + get lost: unable to find way( lc ng ) + carsick( adj ): feeling sick because of a cars movement ( say t ) - Ask sts to read the new words orally and individualy. - Ask sts to work in pairs to do the task. - Go around to observe sts working. - Check sts s answers by calling on some sts to read out things in A and some others to read out the corresponding consequences in B. 14 - Listen and give remarks. 3. While you speak: Aims: Sts can talk about their excursion
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students activities - Some sts answer: Yes, ew have. We prepared food, drinks, tents, cameras ..
- Listen to the T.
- Read the sentences and find some new words. - Listen and copy down these words into their notebooks. - Read the new words. - Work in pairs. - Read the answers aloud. 1- f 2- e 3- h 5- b 6- c 7- a
4- g 8- d
- Listen to the T.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
to Huong Pagoda and express their regrets. + Task 2: Imagine that you are Ngas classmates and you are not happy with the excursion to Huong Pagoda. Now you are talking with some friends about what you wish you had or hadnt done. - Before sts do the task, T asks sts to read the examples in the textbook and recall what grammatical structure is used in the example. - Revise the conditional sentence type 3 by giving an example: + Eg: If I had had money, I would have bought this car. ( But I didnt have money and so I didnt buy it.) - Ask sts to look at the example and tell the T the form as well as the form of the conditional sentence type 3.
- Read the examples and listen to the T.
15
- Look at the example and tell the whole class the form and the use: +Form: If + S + past perfect, S + would/ could +have + P II. +Use: The third conditional is used to talk unreal situations in the past. - Work in groups. - Compare the answers with others. 2. If we had brought enough food and drinks we wouldnt have spent a lot of money eating in expensive restaurants. 3. If some of us hadnt had food poisoning we could have enjoyed our visit. 4. If we had had rain coats, we wouldnt have got wet and have - Ask sts to work in groups. got a cold. - Go around to help sts. - Ask sts to compare their answers with 5. If some of us hadnt left our luggage on the coach when we another group. - Call on some sts to speak out their arrived, we could have had clothes and money with us. answers in front of the class. 6. If we had been careful when walking in Huong Pagoda, we wouldnt have got lost. 7. If we hadnt thrown wast in the forest, we wouldnt have got a fine. 8. If we had stayed there more than one day, we could have visited all - Listen to sts and give remarks. the pagodas. 4. After you speak: Aims: Sts practise telling about an - Listen to the T. excursion to Huong Pagoda and expressing the regrets. + Task 3: You are Nga. You are going to work in - Work in pairs. pairs. Tell your partner about your classs excursion to Huong Pagoda and express your regrets about what you did - Some sts tell about their or didnt do during the excursion. excursion in front of the class. - Ask sts to work in pairs using the third conditional to do the task. - Go around to observe, offering help
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
and collecting mistakes. - Ask one or more sts to tell about their excursion in front of the class and give remarks. 5. Homework:( 1 min) 2 - Write down what they have discussed in task 3. EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Sts get: - more information about Cuc Phuong National Park. - Some set expressions - Vocabulary on nature II. Skill: - Listening: fill in the gaps, answer questions - Speaking: - Discuss the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park. III. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassette, textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: - Ask one st to tell the whole class 5 about his/her class excursion to - Listen to their friend and give Huong Pagoda and express his/her remarks regrets about what he/she did or did not do during the excursion. - Listen and give remarks 2. Before you listen: Aims:to focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and 10 phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups and discuss the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
a. Divide sts into small groups and ask them to discuss the following questions: a. Where is Cuc Phuong National Park? b. What is the area of the rainforest in Cuc Phuong National Park? c. When is the best time to visit Cuc Phuong National Park? d. What can be seen in Cuc Phuong National Park? - Ask some sts to give their answer. b. Introduce the topic of the listening text. - Introduce some new words/ expressions - o'fficially (adv): formally - span (v): connect. - 'fauna (n): all the animals of an area. - f'lora (v): all the plants of a particular area - a'ttack(n): a violent attempt to hurt sb - de'feat(v): win sb - in'vader: (n) The French and Americans were invaders. - 'ethnic mi'nority (n): The Tay, Nung, Dao ..... - Read the words again and asks sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs.
questions.
One st from each group stands up and gives their answer.. - Copy down the words and phrases into their notebooks.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud.
- Listen to the T. - Read the statements in pairs and try to guess the missing information. - Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. 1960 2. 160 km south west of 3. 100,000 visitors 4. 2,000; 450 5. Quen Voi - Check their answer say it aloud, and then correct their work if they
- Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: 20 + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and filling in the gaps. - Introduce sts that they are going to listen to the tape about Cuc Phuong National Park and they have to fill in the gaps in each sentence given - Ask sts to read the sentences in pairs
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
and make sure that they understand have the wrong answer. them. Sts try to guess the missing information. - Play the tape twice and ask sts to fill in the gaps. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Checks sts answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the - Listen to the T. correction. - Read the questions in pairs and try + Task 2 to do the task. Aims: Practise listening and - Listen to the tape and do the task. Answering questions. - Compare their answer. - Ask sts to listen to the tape again and - Give their answer. answer the given questions. 1. It covers 3 provinces: Ninh Binh, - Ask sts to read the questions to see if Hoa Binh, and Thanh Hoa. they understand them. 2. It is about 160 km. - Play the tape once and ask sts note 3. They come to see the work being down the neccessary information. done to protect endanger species. - Ask sts to compare their answer in 4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing pairs. invaders in the spring of 1789 - Check sts answer. 5. They live mainly on bee keeping - Play the tape once again, stop the and farming. tape where necessary and conduct the - Check their answer say it aloud, correction. and then correct their work if they 4. After you listen: have the wrong answer. 8 - Ask sts to work in groups and use the information in Task 1 and 2 and -Work in groups to discuss. the reading text to disscus the following problems: - Time founded - Area, location - Numbers of visitors - Historical event - Local people. -Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - One/ two sts present. - Ask one or two sts to present in front of the whole class.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: 1 Write a short paragraph about Cuc Phuong National Park EXPERIENCES:

I. Objectives: - Students can write a letter of acceptance or refusal. II. Skill: - Writing: write a letter of acceptance or refusal. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5 - Ask one st to talk about the special features of Cuc Phuong National Park. - Listen to their friend and give remarks. - Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give remarks. 2. Before you write: - Aims: to get sts to read the 15 expressions in the table and to do - Listen to the teacher carefully. task 1 and task 2. + Task 1: - Introduce the topic of the lesson: - Copy down the words into theit Write a letter of acceptance or notebooks. refusal. - Introduce some new words:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ a'cceptance (n): the noun of "accept" +re'fusal (n) : the noun of " refuse" + dec'line (v) : refuse sth offered ( politely) - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down these words into their notebooks. - Ask sts to read the expressions in the table in 2 minutes . - Remind sts of three invitation letters that they have already read in Unit 10 and ask them to work in pairs to complete three reply letters by using the expressions in the table. - Ask sts to do in 3 minutes and move around to help if necessary. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: - Remind sts of the letter Nam wrote to Lam to invite Lam to spend a weekend with him. And now Lam write a letter accepting Nam's invitation. - Ask sts to work in pairs to rearrange the sentences into a letter. - Move round to help if necessary. - Get feedback and give remarks. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing a letter of acceptance or refusal. - Ask sts to read the requirement of 15 task 3. - Ask them to write a letter accepting or declining his/her friend's invitation. - Ask them to pay attention to the structure of a letter: greeting, organisation ( introduction, body...) - Suggest that they use letters in task 1 and task 2 as sample letters. - Let sts write in 13 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Do the task in pairs. - Share their answer with their friends. - Present their ideas. 1. Accepting: Yes, I'd like/love to. 2. Refusing: I'm afraid I can't come because 3. Accepting: I'd be delighted to. - Listen to the teacher.
- Listen to the teacher. - Work in pairs to rearrange the sentences into a letter. - Present their ideas: 1.d 2. e 3. c 4. a 5. f 6. b - Listen to the teacher. - Read the requirement. - Listen to the teacher. - Do the writing task.
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph)

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Aims: to get feedback and check sts' 8 work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks
5. Homework: - Part D (page 68- workbook).
"Dear Binh, It's lovely to hear that you are going for a picnic to Cuc Phuong National Park next weekend. Thank you for inviting me to join you but I'm afraid I can't come. My English friend, Maria, is coming to Vietnam next weekend and I have promised to cook her some of our traditional dishes on Saturday morning. After that, I'm going to take her to some famous places in Hai Duong. I hope that you will have a wonderful day in Cuc Phuong. Remember to show me the photos you take in Cuc Phuong whem you get home. Your friend,
EXPERIENCES: .

I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /t/ and /d/ correctly. - Students revise conditional sentence type 3. II. language focus: 1 . Grammar: -Conditional sentence: type .
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. Vocabulary:- Vocabulary concerning natural environment and conservation. III. Skill: - Pronunciation: /t/ and/d/ . - Conditional sentence type 3. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to read the letter they - One st reads his/her letter aloud wrote at home aloud. aloud in front of the whole class. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Aims: to introduce two sounds /t/ and /d / and help sts to practise these sounds. 10 a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds. pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat. sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these /t/ /d/ sounds accurately. topic difficulty / d / : a voiced sound contain invader / t / : a voiceless sound plant spend - Ask them to look at the textbook, ........................... listen and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Move around to help . - Answers: - Ask two sts to read again and give /t/ /d/ remarks. next to third b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page restaurant dear 119 in the book. counter stayed - Ask them to work in pairs to read the ............................... sentences and then find out the words - Read the sentences. containing sound / t / and sound / d / . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Listen to the teacher - Ask some sts to read these sentences - Read the example and tell the whole aloud. class their ideas. - Listen and give remarks. + Form:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
3. Grammar: Aims: to revise conditional sentence 29 type 3 and have sts do Ex1 and EX2. + Conditional sentence type 3: - Recall conditional sentence type 1 and type 2. - Revise conditional sentence type 3 by giving an example. eg: Tom didn't study hard so he fail the exam. => I can say: " If Tom had studied hard, he would have passed the exam." - Ask sts to tell the T the form and the use of conditional sentence type 3. Note: - We can use could/might/should instead of would in main clause. - We can also use the past perfect continuous in If - clause. - Ask sts to give some examples. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task. - Ask sts to do the exercise individually and then compare their answers in pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Check the exercise sentence by sentence. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to write the sentences on the board. - Ask two sts to give remarks. - Check and give remarks. 1 5. Homework - EX 3 ( page 120 - st's book)
If - clause , main clause If + S + V( past perfect), S + would +have + V( PII) + Use: - to talk about something that might have happened in the past but didn't. - Listen to the teacher and take note. - Give examples. - Some sts report. 1. had known 2. had had 3. would have gone 4. would have passed 5. could have enjoyed 6. had known 7. had stopped 8. had called - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: Each st writes three sentences 1. .... hadn't stopped so suddenly, the accidents wouldn't have happened. 2. .... that Lam had to get up early, I would have woken him up. 3. ... lent me the money, I would have been able to buy the car. 4. ... been wearing a seat belt, she would have been injured. 5. ..... had braekfast, you wouldn't behungry now. 6. ... had some money on me, I would have got a taxi. - Listen to the teacher.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
EXPERIENCES:
Date: 16/01/2011 Period: 70 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10
TEST YOURSELF D
I. Objectives: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 9, unit 10 and unit 11. * Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 9, unit 10 and unit 11. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. II. Skills: listening, speaking and writing. III. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: - Ask one st to do Ex 3 in the EX 3: workbook on the board. 1. If I had been working at the restaurant last - Ask one st to give remarks. night, I would have waited on your table. - Give remarks and marks. 2. If they had been paying attention, they would have seen the sign markin. . 3. If Carol hadn't been studying, she would have answered the phone. 4. If the sun hadn't been shining, we wouldn't have gone to the beach yesterday. 5. If the music hadn't been playing loudly at the restaurant, I would have heard ... 2. The new lesson: - One st gives remarks. - Ask sts to do part II, part III and
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
part IV at home in advance to save time. - Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. - Ask sts to do listening in class. 2.1. Listening: - Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. - Introduce new words: + campground (n) : a place for camping + trail (n) : a path + geyser (n): mch nc phun - Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. - Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners. - Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers. - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Check and give feedback. 2.2. Reading: - Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. - Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud. - Listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. - Ask 2 sts to write their answers on the board. - Ask two other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 2.4. Writing: - Ask some sts to read their writing aloud.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the textbook and read the statements. - Try to focus on the important words. - Copy down these words into their notebooks. - Listen and read after the teacher.
- Listen carefully and do the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers. 1. they go to a national park to enjoy the nature. 2. It became a national park in 1872. 3. No, it isn't. It's the world's largest park. 4. It has about 70 geysers. 5. They mustn't pick the flowers, feed or hunt the animals.
- work in groups to share their ideas. - Some sts stand up to report. 1. a. junk and litter c. highway b. landscape d. healthy. 2. a. T b. T c. F d. F e. T f. T
- Discuss in groups. - Answers: a. 1. has been cleaned......2. have been turned on..........3. are waiting b. 1. knew ......2. would help.....3. knows c. 1. decided ....2. to stay......3. would have gone out ......4. hadn't been - Read their writing aloud " Dear Alex, You will be delighted to know Father is giving a party to celebrate the New Year. He has invited some of our relatives and his friends to make the party a success. I too have invited a number of my friends in the neighbourhood. Mother has asked me to tell you to come home for the New Year celebration. I'm sure you will be here in time to share the fun
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
-Ask some sts to give remarks. 3. Homework: - Part B ( Page 65 - workbook)
with us on that day. Your sister, Helen - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
EXPERIENCES:
Forty five minute test 3

Name:.. Class: 10 Mark Teachers comments
I. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Pronounciation: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced different others: a. hair b. fail c. chair d. air-conditioner a. change b. chemistry c. children d. choose a. feature b. take c. content d. tableland a. here b. atmosphere c. bear d. clear a. mouse b. close c.show d.know
II. Vocabulary and Grammar: A. Choose the correct answer to complete sentences by circling A,B,C or D. 1.Whales and dolphin areThey eat meat and fishes. A. carnivores B. krills C.mammals D.animals 2.We should find out the way to save the..species from hunting pressure. A. danger B. endangered C.dangerous D.endanger 3.Plants and forests help .water and prevent flood or erosion. A.run-off B.flow off C.conserve D. pollute 4.The goverments should.some laws to protect oceans. A.giving B.to give C.given D.give 5.The robbers.two days after they had robbed the bank. A.arrested B. were arrested C. are arrested D.were being arrested
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
6.If we continue destroying the animals natural.many spiecies will be disappeared forever. A.habitat B. habit C.habitual D.habition 7.Vietnam is a..country which has a various flora and fauna. A.tropical B.temperate sub-tropical D.hot and dry 8.Many trees.since Tree Planting Festival. A. have been grown C. has been grown B.are grown D. will be grown 9.I am sure that the letter..tomorrow. A. will send B. is being sent C. will be sent D.was sent 10. there are many trees can be used as medicine to save people in..in Cuc Phuong National Park. A. fauna B. animals C.flora water B. Complete the following sentences with the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. If she (come) ..................... late again, she will lose her job. 2. If we had enough money, we (go) .......................... to the concert. 3. Michael will phone you if he (have)........................ time. 4. If we lived in a town, life (be) ..................... easier. 5. I know I would have felt better if I (stop)......................... smoking. III. Reading: Read the passage and decide whether statements are True or False: What is a rain forest? A rain forest is a place where there is lots of rain. One kind of rain forest is called a temperate rain forest. You can find temperate rain forests where the weather is cool and mild, and very wet. There is a temperate rain forest growing near the Northwest coast of the United States. Just few kinds of evergreen trees grow there. Most of the world's rain forests are tropical rain forests with many kinds of trees. Tropical rain forests grow in warm places near Earth's equator. The equator is an imaginary line that goes around the middle of the planet. There are tropical rain forests in Central and South America, Africa, and Asia. The world's largest rain forest is the Amazon rain forest in South America. It's always hot and wet in a tropical rain forest. T F A rain forest is a place where it rains a lot. A temperate rain forest is a place where it is cool and dry Most of the world's rain forest are temperate rain forests. Tropical rain forests are located in Central and South America, Africa, and Asia. 5. No tropical rain forests in the world are larger than the Amazon rain forest in South America. IV. Writing:
1. 2. 3. 4.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
A friend invited you to go for a picnic to Hi Lim in Bc Ninh next weekend because he/she know you like listening Quan h songs very much.Write a letter for accepting/refusing him/her. ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................
ANSWERS
I-Pronunciation: 1.B 2.B 3.A 4.C 5.A
II.Language Focus: A. 1.A 2.B 3.C 4.D 6.A 7.C 8.A 9. C B. 1.comes 2. would go 3. has 4. would be 5.had stopped III-Reading: 1.T 2.F 3.F 4.T 5.T IV-Writing:
5.B 10.C
..................................................................................................
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 12: MUSIC

I. Objectives: By the end of the leson: - Students know more about the role of music in our life. II. Language focus: 1. Grammar: - To-infinitive - Wh-questions 2. Vocabulary: - Vocabulary concerning musicand theatre,films and cinema:compose, rock 'n 'roll, mournful, solemn...... III. Skill: - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through sentence completing and answering questions. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, tape. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up 5 - Play the tape with 5 pieces of music and ask sts to guess what types of music they - Listen to the tape and guess. are. - Stand up and say aloud the names - Get feedback and check. of the types of music. .........
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. Before you read: Aims: To provide sts with words/phrases about music. 12 a. Matching: - Ask sts to work in pairs to match the descriptions to the types of music given in the part: - For each type of music, 2 sts from 2 pairs are required to give their match orally. - Listen and help sts to give correct match. b.Vocabulary. - Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + Emotion(n): a strong feeling e.g.: hate, love....... + Convey(v):= Show, express + Integral part(n): = necessary part + Lull sb (v): >< wake somebody up. + Delight(v): To make somebody happy. + Funeral(n): a funaral is celebrated when someone dies. + Solemn(adj): serious, not happy + Mournful(adj): sad - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) - Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: Aims: Read for information to do the sentence completing, and answering 20 excercises + Task 1: Sentence completing. - Ask sts to read the passage indepently then use the words/ phrases in the box to complete the sentences. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in the context of the reading. - Call on 7-8 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class(1 st/ 1 time/ 1 sentence).
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Work in pairs to match. - Give answers orally. 1- b 2- e 3- d 4- a c - Others listen - Listen and read after the T. - Write down these words into their notebooks. 5-
- Listen and repeat. - Read these words and check for their partner. - Read the words aloud. - Listen to the T.
- Work individually. - Report their answers sentence by sentence. 1. Communicate 2. Lull 3. delights 4. integral part 5. solemn 6. emotion 7. mournful - Listen to the T - Students do the work in pairs - Some pairs report their answers while others watch.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: Questions answering. - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage more carefully and find the answers to the questions given. - Ask sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that helps them to find the correct answers. - 5-6 sts from 5-6 groups are required to give answers in front of the class(1 st/ 1 time/ 1answer). - Listen and help the students to give correct answers. 4. After you read: + Questions Answers Aims: Students' summary about the roles of music. - Ask sts to work in pairs to give answers to the questions given in the part. - Go round to help sts with their work. - 2-3 pairs are required to give answers to one question orally in front of the class. - Listen and help sts to give correct answers. 5. Homework: - Write about the roles of music and which role is the most important.
1. Language and music. 2. It can express ideas, thoughts and feelings. 3. It adds joyfulness to the atmosphere of a festival and make a funeral more solemn and mournful. 4. It makes people happy and excited. It delights the senses. 5. It is a billion-dollar industry. - Self-correct the work
- Work in pairs orally. - Some pairs report while others listen. 1. Students tell 5 roles. 2. Students give their own ideas.
- Listen to the T.
EXPERIENCES:
Date: 19/01/11 Period : 74 Date of Class teaching

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
UNIT 12: MUSIC LESSON 2 : SPEAKING Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 10 10 I. Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students know about some favourite kind of music. II. Skill: Speaking: - Asking and answering questions about music. - Talking about favourite kinds of music III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, pictures. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm- up: 5 Aims : get used to the topic. - Give sts some pictures of singers and ask sts about their names. - Ask sts what they know about these singers and name some of their songs. 2. Before you speak: 10 Aims: : focus sts on the topic and introduce the words and phrases used in the task. + Task 1: Answering questions based on the reading text. - Introduce the situation: You are going to read what Ha Anh says about music. - Give sts some new words: + keep sb happy: make sb happy + cheer sb up: make sb happier/more cheerful - Ask one st to read the passage aloud. - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. - Go around to observe sts working. - Ask some sts to present their answers in front of the class. - Get feedback and give correct answers: 3.While you speak: 13 Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite kind of music. + Task 2: Asking and answering about music taste. - Tell sts that they are going to ask your partners questions to get information to
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the pitures and give the names of some foreign singers. - Talk about these singers.
- Listen to the T. - Take notes - Listen and read the text . - Work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. - Some sts present. 1. She likes pop music. 2. Because it keeps her happy. 3. The Backstreet Boys. 4. She listens to music all the time
- Listen to the T. - Listen to the T and read the information in the table. - Think of the questions and say
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
complete the table below. - Ask sts to look at the first column of the table which includes 5 items they should ask their friend about. - Ask sts what questions they can ask if they want to know about their friends favourite kind of music , reasons for listening to music, favourite band.
aloud: + What kind of music do you like? + Why do you like it? + Who is your favourite singer/ musician? + What is your favourite song/piece of music? + When do you listen to music? - Listen and take notes.
- T. may introduce some adj. and expressions to talk about music: + make sb excited/relaxed. + help sb forget troubles and worries + relaxing/ peaceful...... - Ask sts to form groups of 3. One of them will be a journalist who will interview their friends about their music taste. The journalist has to ask two sts some questions and complete the table. Sts can change their roles if time permits. - Go around to help sts and collect the mistakes. 15 4. After you speak: (15 mins) Aims: Sts make group report. + Task 3: Reporting on the information - Ask sts to report what they have got from their friends to the whole class. - Before sts report T asks sts to look at the example and elicits some structures they can use: + Both A and B like .. + A likes, and so does B. + A likes and B does , too. + A likes, but B prefers.. - Ask sts to prepare in one minute. - Ask some sts to report what they have found out about their patners in front of the class. - Correct the Ss mistakes. 2 5. Homework: - Write a short paragraph about their friends' music taste.
- Work in groups of 3: one will be a journalist and others will be students in the class.
- Listen to the T. - Listen to the T and take notes if necessary.
- Some sts report in front of the class. E.g: " Both Hoa and Binh like pop music. Hoa likes it because it makes her relaxed while Binh likes it because it is easy to listen to. Hoa's favourite band is Westlife but Binh like Lam Truong very much. ............"
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
EXPERIENCES:
UNIT 12: MUSIC LESSON 3 : LISTENING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson: - Sts know more about Van Cao and his music. II. Skills: - Listening: choose True/ False statements and answer questions. - Speaking: discuss the one's ideas about Van Cao's music. III. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board. IV. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Home work checking: 7 - Ask one st to talk about what kind of One st presents. Others listen and music he likes best. give remarks. 2. Before you listen:(12 mins) 12 Aims: focus sts on the topic and review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. - Work in groups to say about the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
a. - Focus sts on the picture in the textbook and ask sts if they know the person in it. - Introduce Van Cao, the most famous musician in the history of Vietnamese music then ask sts to work in groups and ask about Van Cao's life and works. - Possible questions: - Where and when was he born? - Was he born in a rich or poor family? - When did he start writing songs? - Can you name some of his famous songs? What is his most famous one? - Ask sts to give their answer to the question in p. 128. b. Introduce some new words - rousing (adj): ho hng si ni - lyrical(adj): tr tnh - solemn(adj): trang nghim - national anthem(n): E.g.: Tin Qun Ca - Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 17 3. While you listen: + Task 1: Aims: Practise listening and marking True/ False statements. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to a conversation between Lan Huong and Quang Hung about Quang Hung's opinion towards Van Cao's music. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the statements given and guess if they are true or false. - Ask sts to listen to the talk and tick the right column to indicate their answer and underline the false information. T plays the tape twice. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
person in the picture. - Listen to the teacher and then work in groups to discuss Van Cao's life and career. - Ask some pairs to ask and answer.
Some sts stand up and give their answer. - Sui m - Tin qun ca - Lng ti - Trng ca Sng L - Copy down the words and phrases into their notebooks. - Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud
- Listen to the T. - Work in pairs to guess if the statements are true or false. - Listen to the tape and do the task - Compare their answer. - Give their answer. 1. F The guess is Quang Hung. 2.F He likes some Vietnamese musicians 3. T 4. F It was written in 1944. 5. F ( He always ..... ) - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
wrong answer. - Check sts answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims: Practise listening for specific information by answering given questions. - Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions and know what information they need to answer the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice and take short notes to answer the questions. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. - Work in pairs to read the questions. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes. 1. It is 'My favourite Musician'. 2. He likes the song 'Tien Quan Ca' most. 3. Because it is hard and solemn, it makes him feel great and proud of his country. - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer.
4. After you listen: - Ask sts to work in pairs and discuss Quang Hung's ideas about Van Cao's music. T may introduce some sentences to show one's opinion: + Agreeing: - I (strongly) agree with him. - I share his opinion. - I share the same point of view with him. - I think his opinion is similar to mine. + Disagreeing: - I'm sorry but I don't think so. - I don't agree with him. - I don't share his point of view. - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively.
- Work in pairs revising Quang Hung's ideas about Van Cao's music.
Two sts present.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask some pairs to present in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: Write a short paragraph about your opinion about Van Cao's Music
EXPERIENCES:
UNIT 12: MUSIC LESSON 4 : WRITING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students can write a profile. II. Skills: - Reading: read the information about Van Cao. - Writing: make up complete sentences about Scott Joplin, using the prompts and write about the life story of Van Cao. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5 - Ask one st to talk about his/her opinion - Listen to their friend and give about Quang Hung's ideas about Van remarks. Cao's music. - Ask other sts to listen to their friend - Listen to the teacher. and give remarks.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Check and give remarks. 2. Before you write: - Aims: to get sts to recognise what a profile is like and to read the 20 information about Van Cao. + Task 1: - Introduce the topic of the lesson: Writing a profile. - Introduce some new words: + 'profile (n): a report of a person ( usu. in a newspaper article) +'mixture (n) : s ho quyn +tune (n): giai iu + Ragtime (v) : a kind of music which is a mixture of classical European and African beats. + rag (n): a Ragtime song + beat (n): nhp + 'talent (n): a natural skill/ ability. + 'talented (a): having talent + app'reciate (v): recognise sb's good qualities. - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down these words into their notebooks. - Ask some sts to read these words again. - Ask sts to read the prompts in task 1 and to make up complete sentences about Scott Joplin by adding suitable auxiliaries, articles or prepositions and appropriate verb tenses. - Allow sts to work in pairs first to make up sentences orally and the write them down into their notebooks. - Move around to help if necessary. - Ask sts to compare their answer with other sts.
- Copy down the words into theit notebooks.
- Listen and repeat. - Some sts stand up and read again. - Read the prompts and do the task in pairs. - Write down the sentences into their notebooks. - Share their answer with their friends. - Present their ideas. 1. He learned to play music when he was very young. 2. Scott learned to play the works of composers like Bach, Beethoven, and Mozart as well as to compose music. 3. He quickly became famous. 4. His tune were wonderful mixture of classical European and African beats which were known as Ragtime. 5. All in all, he wrote 50 piano rags, and was called the King of Ragtime. 6. Scott Joplin died in 1917. - Listen to the teacher. - Answer T's questions: 1. We use the past simple. 2. the date of birth/death, the place
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Get feedback and give remarks.
of birth, family, career, personal life.
- Focus sts on some points about writing a profile by asking some questions: - Listen to the teacher. 1. Which tense do you use? 2. What kind of information is included - Work in pairs to discuss. in a profile? + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the information about Van Cao and to work in pairs to discuss how to write a profile about him. - Ask them to refer to their writing in task 1 as a sample. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing about a life 12 story of Van Cao. - Ask sts to write down what they have discussed into their notebooks. - Let sts write in 10 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 7 4. After you write: Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) " Van Cao was born on the fifteenth of November, 1923 in Nam Dinh. His parents were poor workers. However, he started composing music when he was very young. His first song was written in 1939 and it quickly became famous. The song " Tien Quan Ca", which is the national anthem of Vietnam, was written in 1944. Van Cao was also very good at other artistic works like song writing, poem writing and paintings. He died on the tenth of July,1995. He was known as a very talented musician and highly appreciated by the Vietnamese people.
1 5. Homework: - Part D (page 73 - workbook). EXPERIENCES:

Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 12: MUSIC LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /s/ and /z/ correctly. - Students revise to-infinitive and Wh-questions. II. Language focus: + Language: - Pronunciation: /s/ and/z/ . - To-infinitive and Wh-questions. III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to read the passage they - One st reads his/her writing aloud in wrote about Eric Clapton's life aloud. front of the whole class. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation: - Aims: to introduce two sounds /s/ and 10 /z / and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds. pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat. sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds /s/ /z/ accurately. Sue zoo / z / : a voiced sound sip zip / s / : a voiceless sound piece peas - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen ........................... and repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 130 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /s / and sound /z / . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 28 3. Grammar: Aims: to revise to-infinitive and Whquestions and have sts do Ex1,EX2 and EX3. a. to-infinitive: - Recall the use of to-infinitive by giving an example: e.g.: A: What did you buy this cassette player for? B: I bought this cassette player to study English. e.g.: To keep fit, you have to do morning exercises every day. - Ask sts to tell the T the use of toinfinitive in these sentences. Note: - We can put to-infinitive at the beginning or at the end of the sentence. - We can also use in order to or so as to to show purpose. - Ask sts to give some examples. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to look at Ex1 and to do the task.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /s/ /z/ Susan music classical jazz sound records ............................... - Read the sentences.
- Listen to the teacher - Read the example and tell the whole class their ideas. + Use: - to show purpose. - Listen to the teacher and take note.
- Give examples. - Some pairs report. 1. I phoned her to tell her good news. 2. I'm saving money to buy a cassette player 3. She practise singing all day to win the singing contest. ................................... - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Do the Ex individually. EX 2: Each st writes three sentences 1. to read 2. to buy 3. to send 4. to invite
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to do the exercise in pairs and then compare their answers with other pairs. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Ask some pairs to report. - Listen and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to report. - Check and give remarks. b. Wh-questions: - Ask one st to name some question words they have already known. + Note: - The question element generally comes first in the sentence. - There is no S - operator inversion in the Wh - question asking about the S. e.g.: Who gave you that present? + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. 1 - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework - Part B( page 71 - workbook)
5. to learn - Listen to the teacher. - One st answers: Who, where, when, what, which ..... - Listen to the T and take note.
- Two sts write their answers on the board: 1. What will you do if it rains? 2. What sort of music does your father enjoy listening to? 3. When did he leave for Ho Chi Minh City? 4. Who wants to talk to you? ............................
EXPERIENCES:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA LESSON 1 : READING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know more about the history of films. II. Language focus: a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about films and cinema. b. Language: - The past simple tense. - Vocabulary concerning music: scene, camera, character...... III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through finding the word meanings in contexts, answering questions and identifying the main idea. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 5 - Show sts some pictures of famous film stars or scenes in famous films in - Look at the T's pictures . Vietnam amd in the world. - Stand up and say aloud the names of
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to say the names of these films and film stars. - Get feedback and check. 2. Before you read: Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about 12 films and cinema. a. Answering questions: - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer the questions in Before you read. - Go round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to give answers.
the films and film stars. ......... - Work in pairs to ask and answer. - Give answers orally. 1. I want to see a film on T.V because it is cheap and I may feel more comfortable. - I want to see a film at the cinema because I can see the latest film there. ................................... - Others listen - Listen and read after the T.
- Listen and check. Sts may give different answers. b.Vocabulary. - Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + 'sequence (n):chui + motion (n): s vn ng + movement (n):s chuyn ng + 'decade (n): 10 years + au'dience (n):khn gi + spread (v): lan rng - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) - Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: Aims: Read for information to find the 18 word meaning in contexts, to answer the questions and to find the best title for the passage. + Task 1: Finding the words in the passage - Ask sts to read the passage indepently then read the definition given in task 1 and scan the passage to find the
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Write down these words into their notebooks.
- Listen and repeat. - Read these words and check for their partner. - Read the words aloud. - Listen to the T.
- Work individually. - Report their answers one by one. 1. cinema 2. sequence 3. a decade 4. rapidly 5. scene 6. character - Listen to the T - Students do the work in pairs - Some pairs report their answers while
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
suitable words. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading. - Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. - Call on 6 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: Answering questions. - Ask sts to work in pairs to read the passage more carefully and find the answers to the questions given. - Ask sts to highlight or underline the information in the passage that helps them to find the correct answers. - Move round to help is necessary. - 6 pairs are required to give answers in front of the class. - Listen and help the students to give correct answers. + Task 3: - Ask sts to read the passage again individually and choose the best title for the passage. - Ask one or two sts to give answer and to explain why they choose A, B or C. - Listen and check. 4. After you read:( 9 mins) Aims: Students' summary about the history of cinema. - Ask sts to look at the cues given and work in groups to talk about the history of cinema basing on the cues. - Go round to help sts with their work. - Some presentatives of the groups are required to report in front of the class. - Listen and help sts to give correct answers. 5. Homework: - Write a summary of the reading text basing on what they have discussed in After read.
others watch. 1. It began in the early 19th century. 2. They dicovered that when a sequence of still pictures were set in motion .............. 3. No, they didn't. 4. Audiences were able to see long films in the early 1910s. ................................. - Self-correct the work - Read the passage again and choose the best title. Answer: B ( A brief history only) - Listen to their friends and the T.
- Work in groups orally. - Some sts report.
- Listen to the T.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
EXPERIENCES:
UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA LESSON 2 : SPEAKING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students know about some kinds of film. II. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about some favourite kinds of music. b. Language: - The simple present tense. - Vocabulary to describe films. III. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about film. - Talking about favourite kinds of music. - Expressing attitudes, preferences IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, pictures. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm- up: 5 Aims : to get used to the topic.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Give sts some film posters on the board: + Names of the films: Shrek (1) The adventures of Sherlock Holmes. (2) The Lord of the Rings (3) Pearl Habour ( 4) - Ask sts to match the films with the correct types of films . - Listen and check. 2. Before you speak: 8 Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and to introduce the words and phrases used in the task. + Task 1: - Ask sts to study the table on p. 134 and tick the boxes that suit their preferences for a particular type of films. - Ask sts to compare their answers with a partner. - Call on some sts to report their likes and dislikes. - Listen and give remarks. 3.While you speak: Aims: Sts can talk about their favourite 20 type of films.. + Task 2: Find out what your friends feel about each kind of films. - Give sts some new words: + violent (adj): bo lc + horrifying (adj) lm khip s + moving (adj): cm ng + find + O + Adj - Ask sts to read the new words orally and individually - Introduce sts some expressions of agreement and disagreement. + Agreement: + Disagreement: I agree I don't think so. Yes, exactly Yes, but ........... Right / Sure ! I don't quite agree with you. - Ask some sts to read the model conversation in the textbook. - Divide the class into small groups of 3
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the posters and match the film with the correct types.
- Some sts give the answers. + Key: 1- cartoon 2- detective film 3- action film 4- war film
- Look at the table and tick . - Compare with their partners. - Some sts report: S1: I like science fiction films very much. S2: I don't like cartoons very much. S3: I don't like horror films at all. ......................
- Listen and take notes
- Read the new words orally and individually. - Listen to the T.
- Read the model aloud. - Work in groups and ask some sts to present. A: What do yoy think of detective films? B: Oh, I find them exciting. C: I think so. I think they are good fun. ........................
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
and ask sts to find out what the others of their group feel about the given types of films. - Go around to help sts if necessary . - Call on some groups to practise the dialogues. - Listen and give remarks. + Task 3: Find out the preferences of your friend for films. - Introduce the structure prefer st to st , which can be used to talk about ones preferences. - Ask sts to make sentences with the structure. - Call on two sts to read the model conversation in the textbook. - Ask sts to work in pairs and find out about their partners preference for a particular type of films, basing on the model conversation. - Go around to offer help. - Ask some pairs to practise the dialogues. - Listen and correct their mistakes. 10 4. After you speak: Aims: Sts can talk about the film they have seen. + Task 4: Talk about a film you have seen. - Ask sts to work in groups to ask and answer about a film they have seen using the suggestions given in the textbook. - Ask sts to take turns to talk about the films they have seen. - Go around to help sts. - Ask some sts present in front of the 2 class if the permits 5. Homework: ( 2 min ) - Write a short paragraph about a film they have already said about.
- Listen to the T - Make sentences with the structure. - Two sts read the model conversation. - Work in pairs to ask and answer the similar questions. S1: Which do you prefer, thrillers or science fiction films? S2: Well, I suppose I prefer science fiction films to thrillers. - Listen to the T.
- Work in groups. - Some sts report in front of the class. E.g: I saw " Sand life" at the cinema. It is a love story film. It is about the life of a soldier after the war. He has already been married but after the war he returns with another woman. Life with two wives is definitely not easy. I feel sorry for the soldiers' life after the war. I like the film because of its value.
EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA LESSON 3 : LISTENING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Sts know how some people can arrange to do st. II. Language: - Vocabulary on days of the week . III. Skills: - Listening: Listen for the main idea and fill in the chart . - Speaking: Talk about sb's plans. IV. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Homework checking: 5 -Ask one sts to talk about a film he - One st presents.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
likes best. - Listen and give remarks. 2. Before you listen: Aims:to focus sts on the topic and to 12 review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. a. Ask sts to work in groups and list the types of entertainments. - Note down the list on board: go to the cinema/ watch TV listen to music/ ............. - Ask sts to read the table in the book and put a tick on the right column. - Compare their answers with a partner. - Ask some sts to speak aloud. b. Introduce some new words - ti'tanic (adj): great, huge (The name of a film) - su'ppose(v): think that st is true but not be sure - guess(v): predict, give an answer but do not know if it is right - instead (adv): in the place of st/ sb - Read the words asks sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again 3. While you listen: + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening and 17 marking True/ False statements. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to a conversation between two friends, Lan and Huong. - Ask sts to work in pairs, look at the picture and guess what the conversation is about. - Ask sts to listen to the talk and answer the question: "What are they planning to do?". T plays the tape once. - Ask sts to exchange their answer in
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Others listen and give remarks. - Listen to the T.
- Work in groups entertainments
to
list
the
- Stand up and give their answers. S1: I never go to the cinema. S2: I often watch T.V. S3: I sometimes listen to the radio. - Listen to their friends. - Copy the words and phrases.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some sts read the words aloud.
- Listen to the T. -Work in pairs to guess what the conversation is about. -Listen to the tape and do the task - Exchange their answer. - Gives their answer. They are planning to go to the cinema together to see Titanic - Check their answer and then correct their work if necessary.
- Work in pairs to have a look at the chart. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
pairs. - Check sts answer. - Play the tape once again and conduct the correction. Mon + Task 2: Aims: to practise listening for specific information by fillingin a chart. -Ask sts to have a look at the chart in pairs and make sure they know what information they need to fill in the blanks. - Ask sts to listen to the tape once/twice and take short notes to fill in the chart. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. Tue Wed
Lan see a play
Huong
work and go to singing club Thu visit grandparents Fri take Chineseclasses Sat work (busy) Sun go on a picnic Key: Tuesday - Check their answer, and then correct their work if necessary. - Study the chart and find out a day when both of the girls can go to the cinema. Sts give their answer.
- Ask sts to look at the chart again and find out if there is a day when both Lan and Huong are free to go to the cinema together. 4. After you listen: - Work in pairs talking about the two - Ask sts to work in pairs and use the people' plans chart to talk about Lan and Huong's - Some sts present. plan for nextweek - Revise some structures to show one's plans: - be going to V - be Ving - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask some sts to present in front of the whole class. - Check and gives remarks.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
5. Homework: 3 Write a short paragraph about your plan for week. EXPERIENCES:
Date: 02/03/2011 Period : 81 Clas s 10A Date of teaching
UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA LESSON 4 : WRITING Students absence Notes
I. Objectives: 1. Education Aims: - Students can write a description of a film. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - The film Titanic. b. Language: - Language used to describe a film. - The present tenses . 3. Skills: - Reading: read the description of the film Titanic and then answer the questions. - Writing: write about a film they have seen. II. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. -sub-board and hand out
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
III. Procedures: Time Teacher's activities WARM-UP: 5 Network -Gives instructions. -Distributes the handouts to each group.
Students' activities - Work in groups of 4 or 6 students and find out as many words which relate to the topic word as possible.
film
film
17
- Check and find out the winnner. -Leads in the lesson. 2. Before you write: - Aims: to get sts to recognise how to describe a film and to read the information about the film Titanic. + Task 1: - Introduce the topic of the lesson: describing a film. -Call a student to read the passage aloud in front of the class. - Introduce some new words: +'tragic (a): bi thm +'luxury (n) : s xa hoa +'voyage (n): a long journey by sea + ad'venturer (v) : ngi thch phiu lu. + be engaged: nh hn + 'iceberg (n): tng bng tri - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then copy down these words into their notebooks.
-All students read through th - Copy down the words into theit notebooks.
- Listen and repeat. - Some sts stand up and read again. - Read the description of the film Titanic in task 1 and to answer the questions about the film. - Work in pairs to ask and answer and then share their answer with their friends. - Present their ideas.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask some sts to read these words again. -Use the subboard to show the questions and form of answers or write it up on the suboard.
1. The name of the film is Titanic. 2. It is a tragic love story film. 3. It is about the sinking of a luxury liner. 4. It is made in America. 5. It is based on the true story of - Allow sts to work in pairs to ask Titanic. and answer the questions orally. 6. The main character are Jack - Move around to help if Dawson and Rose DeWitt Bukater. necessary. 7. Jack is a young and generous - Ask sts to compare their answer adventurer. Jack and Rose fall in love with other pairs. with each other. 8. It has a sad ending. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: - Ask sts to think of a film they have already seen and then work in pairs to ask and answer similar questions to those in task 1. - Allow sts to work in pairs in 5 minutes. - Move around to help if necessary and to check . - Correct sts' mistakes if there are any. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing a description of a film they have seen basing on the answers.. - Distributes the hand outs to ech groups. - Ask sts to write down what they have discussed into their notebooks. - Let sts write in 10 minutes. - Ask them to refer to the model description in task 1 if necessary. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write: Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work.
- Listen to the teacher. - Think of a film that they have seen. - Work in pairs to ask and answer about the films they have seen. - Listen to the teacher.
13
-Work in groups. - Do the writing task.
- Read their writing: ( a sample paragraph) " Of all the films I have seen, " Gone with the wind" is the film I like best. "
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Collects Sts writing and hangs them on the board. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer.
Gone with the wind" is a love story film. It is about the change in a woman 's life during the civil war in America. The film is made in America. It is based on the famous novel " Gone with the wind" written by Margaret Mitchell. The main character is Scallet O'hara. She is a beautiful but ambitious woman....."
- If time allowed, gives an extra exercises( use sub board). 2 5. Homework: ( 1min) - Part D (page 79 - workbook). - Whole class.
IV-EXPERIENCES: ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ Date: 07/03/11 Period : 82 Date of Class teaching 10 UNIT 13: FILMS AND CINEMA LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Students absence Notes
10 10 I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /f/ and /v/ correctly. - Students learn about: - Adjectives of attitude. - Structure: It is/was not until ... that ... - Articles: a/an and the II. Language focus: + Language: - Pronunciation: /f/ and/v/ . - Adjectives of attitude. - Structure: It is/was not until ... that ...
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Articles: a/an and the III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: ( 5mins) 5 - Ask two sts to talk about the films they - Two sts talk about the films they have seen. have seen.. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Give remarks. - Check and give a mark. - Listen to the teacher. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Aims: to introduce two sounds /f/ and /v / and help sts to practise these 10 sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and - Write down two sounds. pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Listen to the teacher and repeat. sts to repeat. - Look at the book , listen and - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds repeat. accurately. /f/ /v/ / f / : a voiceless sound fan van / v / : a voiced sound first vine - Ask sts to pay attention to the length of form view two sounds. ........................... - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen - Read these words in pairs and and repeat. check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 139 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /f / and sound /v / . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 3. Grammar: ( 29 mins)
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /f/ /v/ feels Stephen enough driving photograph van ............................... - Read the sentences.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Aims: to introduce adjectives of attitude, structure: " It is/was not until ... that ...", articles: " a/an" and "the" and have sts do Ex1,EX2 , EX 3 and EX4. 29 a. Adjectives of attitude: - Firstly ask sts to read the instruction and the example in task 1. - Ask them to do task 1. + Exercise 1: - Ask two sts to write the adjectival forms of the verbs on the board. - Ask sts to compare their answers with other sts. - Move round to conduct the activity. - Look at the board and give remarks. + Tell sts that there may be two adjectival forms of a verb. One ends in -ing and the other ends in -ed. - Ask sts to look at the example and tell the difference E.g: interest => interesting and interested - This book is interesting. - I am interested in this book. I 've read it twice. - Ask sts to do task 2. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to report. - Check and give remarks. b. It is/was not until ... that ... : - Give examples so that sts can see the use as well as the form of this structure: E.g: Mary didn't know how to make cakes until I taught her. = It was not until I taught Mary that she knew how to make cakes. I did not start to learn English until 1995. = It was not until 1995 that I started to
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen to the teacher - Read the instruction and the example and then do task 1. Key: 1. fascinating 2. exciting 3. terrifying 4. irritating 5. horrifying 6. boring 7. surprising 8. amusing ................................ - Listen to the T. - Look at the example. - One st tells the difference: + The -ing adjectives: the nature of sth/sb + The -ed adjectives: how sb feels (about sth). - Some pairs report. 1. depressing - depressed 2. interested - interesting 3. boring - bored ................................... - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Read the examples. - Pay attention to the underlined parts. - Tell the T that the second sentences are more emphatic. - Do the Ex individually. EX3: 1.... 1990 that she became a teacher. 2..... he was 30 that he knew how to swim. 3..... 1980 that they began to learn English. ................................. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the example and the tell the
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
learn English. T the use of these articles: - Ask sts to read the examples and tell + A/an: indefinite articles. the teacher which sentences are more A/an + N (sing) emphatic. + The: definite article. + Exercise 3: The + N - Ask sts to do Ex 3 individually and - Do the exercise in pairs. then share the answers with their - Some sts report: friends. 1. a...the...the - Move round to help if necessary. 2. an...a...a...the...the...the - Ask two sts to write their answers on 3. the...the...the...the the board. 4. an...a...a...the....a - Check and give remarks. - Listen and correct their work if c. A/an and the necessary. - Give an example so that sts can revise the use of these articles: E.g: I have a cat and a dog. The cat is lazy and the dog is intelligent. - Ask sts to do Ex 4. + Exercise 4: - Ask sts to do this execise in pairs. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to report. - Check and give remarks. 1 5. Homework - Part B( page 77 - workbook) EXPERIENCES: Date: 08/03/11 Period : 83 Date of Class teaching 10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students know more about the World Cup. II.Language focus: a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about the World Cup. b. Language: - The passive.
UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP LESSON 1 : READING Students absence
Notes
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Vocabulary concerning sport: tournament, final, trophy...... III. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through matching the words in A with the definitions in B, sentence completing and marking true/false statements. IV. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: 5 - Show sts some pictures of the 2006 World Cup tournament. - Look at the T's pictures . - Ask sts what they know about the 2006 - Stand up and say aloud what they World Cup tournament. know about the latest World Cup - Get feedback and check. tournament. 2. Before you read: ......... 12 Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about the World Cup. a. Answering questions: - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and - Work in pairs to ask and answer. answer the questions in Before you read. - Give answers orally. - Go round to help if necessary. 1. It was held in Japan and Korea. - Ask some sts to give answers. 2. Brazil did. - Listen and check. Sts may give 3. Germany was. different answers. b.Vocabulary. ................................... - Provide sts with the new - Others listen words/phrases: + 'tournament (n): gii u - Listen and read after the T. + 'final (n): chung kt + 'witness (v): chng kin + elimi'nation game (n): trn - Write down these words into their u loi + 'honoured title (n): danh hiu notebooks. cao qu - Listen and repeat. + 'victory (n): chin thng - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask - Read these words and check for sts to repeat it. their partner. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases - Read the words aloud. - Listen to the T. aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) - Listen and help sts to read the 18 words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: Aims: Read for information to match the words in A with the definitions in B, to
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
do sentence completing and to mark true/false statements.. + Task 1: Matching: - Ask sts to read the passage independently then read the words as well as the definitions given in task 1 and scan the passage to match. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading. - Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. - Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: Sentence completing. - Ask sts to scan the passage independently then complete each sentence with a word or a number. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to scan the information as fast as possible. - Move round to help and ask sts to share their ideas. - Call on 5 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. - Feedback and give remarks. + Task 3: - Ask sts to read the passage again individually and mark true/false statements. - Move around to help. - Ask sts to share the answers with their friends and correct the false sentences. - Ask 5 sts to give answers. - Listen and check. 9 4. After you read: Aims: Students' summary of the reading passage. - Ask sts to look at the figures and work in groups to talk about the events mentioned in the passage. - Go round to help sts with their work.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Report their answers one by one. 1. - b 2-c 3 - a 4 - e 5-d - Listen to the T
- Scan the passage and find the information. - Work in pairs to compare their answers. - Report their answers sentence by sentence. 1. 13 2. 32 3. Argentina 4. one 5. 26 - Listen to the T - Read the passage again and mark true/false statements. - Present their ideas: 1. F ( in 1930) 2. F ( every four years) 3. T 4. T 5. F ( .... has won the trophy 5 times ) - Listen to their friends and the T. - Work in groups orally. - Some sts report. E.g: 13 is the number of teams that took part in the first tournament. 1930 is the year when the first World Cup was held. ................................
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Some presentatives of the groups are - Listen to the T. required to report in front of the class. - Listen and help sts to give correct answers. 5. Homework: - Write a summary of the reading text on what they have discussed in After you read.
EXPERIENCES:
Date: 09/03/11 Period : 84 Class 10 Date of teaching
UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP LESSON 2 : SPEAKING Students absence Notes
10 I. Objectives: - Students know about the World Cup. II. Language focus: a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about the World Cup winners. b. Language: - The simple present tense. - Vocabulary about football .
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
III. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about the World Cup. - Talking about the World Cup winners. IV. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, handouts, posters. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm- up: Jumble words 5 Aims :Sts get used to the topic. - Divide the class into small groups of 3 or 4 - Listen to the T. and introduce the games: Sts are to rearrange the letters into meaning words. - Work in groups and find out - Write some groups of letters on the board. the words. - Ask sts to work in groups. - Answers: winner, score, - Ask some goups to give answers . runner-up,host country, - Introduce the new lesson: Today we will champion. talk about the World Cups. 2. Before you speak: Aims: :to focus sts on the topic and 12 introduce the words and phrases used in the task. + Task 1: A World Cup 2002 quiz - Ask S to name the team in the photos on page 145: - Before doing the task T give S some new words: + draw (v,n): e.g. a score of 1- 1 + lose the match to sb + defeat sb: beat sb + penalty shoot - out - Give S some handouts and in each handout T writes two questions about the four football teams: Q1. How many times has Italy won the trophy up to World Cup 2006? Q2. Who was the captain of the French national football team in World Cup 2006? Q3. What was the score of the World Cup 2006 final? Q4. Which team was the runner-up in the World Cup 2006? Q5. Who was the head coach of the German team in World Cup 2006? Q6. What nationality was the top scorer in World Cup 2006? Q7. Who was the captain of the English national football team in World Cup 2006? Q8. Who beat England in the World Cup
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Answer the question of the T. 1- England 3- Italy 2- France 4- Germany - Listen and write down these words into their notebooks. Answer: 1. 4 times 2. Zinedine Zidane 3. 1 - 1( Italy won the game 5 - 3 in a penalty shoout- out. 4. France. 5.Jurgen Klinsmann 6. German 7.David Beckam 8. Portugal (by 3-1) - Listen to their friends and check.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
15
2006 quarter final? - Ask sts to work in groups to answer the questions. - Go around to check that S work and speak English. - Ask some Ss to answer the questions. 3. While you speak: Aims: Sts can talk about the World Cup tournaments. + Task 2: - Ask sts to read the information about 17 World Cup tournaments in the table. - Read the model dialogue aloud and then ask two pairs to read the dialogue again. - Ask sts to work in pairs to make similar dialogues about the World Cup tournaments. - Move round to make sure that Sts are working and to help if necessary. - Ask sts to compare their answers with other pairs. - Ask some pairs to report. - Listen and give remarks.
- Read the table in 2 minutes. - Listen to the T and then some sts read the model again. - Work in pairs to make similar dialogues. - Say aloud their dialogues: S1: Where was the second World Cup held? S2: It was held in Italy. S3: Which teams played in the final match? S4: Italy and Czechoslovakia. ............................... - Listen to the T.
- Listen to the T. - Some Sts read the model. - Work in group to talk about the 4. After you speak: WC winners. Aim: S can talk about the World Cup - Some Sts present in front of the 10 winners class. + Task 3: Suggested answer: - Introduce the task: S are going to take turns The 17th World Cup was help in to talk about the World Cup winners in Korea and Japan in 2002. The different years. final match was between Brazil - Ask Sts to read the model in the textbook. and Germany. Brazil defeated - Ask Sts to work in groups and take turns to Germany by 2 to 0. Brazil talk about the WC winner in a certain year. becema the champion and - Go around to check and to offer help. Germany was the runner- up. - Ask some Sts to talk about different World Cup if time permit. 1 5. Homework: Write a paragraph to talk about World Cup 2006. EXPERIENCES:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 0/03/11 Period : 85 Class 10 Date of teaching
UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP LESSON 3 : LISTENING Students absence Notes
10 10 I. Objectives: - Sts know some information about Pele, the most famous footballer in the world. II. Language: - Vocabulary on football. - The simple past tense. III. Skills: - Listening: Listen and fill in the table, and answer the questions. - Speaking: Talk about important events in Pele's life. IV. Teaching aids: - Tape, cassette player, textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: T Teachers activities Students activities 7 1. Homework checking: - Ask one st to talk about some World Cup - One st presents. tournaments. - Others listen and give remark. - Listen and give remarks. 2. Before you listen: 12 Aims: to focus sts on the topic and to review/ introduce the words and phrases used in the listening text. a. Ask sts to work in groups and talk about their favourite football players, the name of their football clubs, their nationalities... - Ask sts to work in groups again to look at the pictures in the textbook and discuss the football players in the pictures. - Work in groups to talk about their favourite football players - Discuss the players in the pictures - Some sts stand up and give their answers. 1. Pele 2. Maradona 3. Zidane 4. Barthez 5. Beckham
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
b. Introduce some new words - as a/ an...... : When he/ she was a/an.... - kick (v):( miming) -control(v): to make people/ things do what you want. - participate in (v): take part in - ambassador(n) i s - promote(v):to help the progress of st. -Read the words and ask sts to repeat. - Ask sts to read the words in pairs. - Ask some sts to read the words again. 3. While you listen: + Task 1: Aims: Sts practise listening for specific 17 information by filling in a table. - Tell sts that they are going to listen to a talk about Pele. - Ask sts to have a look at the table in pairs and make sure they know what information they need to fill in the blanks. - Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take short notes to fill in the table. - Ask sts to compare their answers in pairs. - Ask some sts to report. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape where necessary and conduct the correction. + Task 2: Aims: Sts practsce listening for specific information by answering questions. - Ask sts to read the questions in pairs and make sure they understand the questions. - Ask sts to listen to the tape twice and take short notes to answer the questions. - Ask sts to compare their answer in pairs. - Ask some sts to report.
- Copy the words and phrases.
- Listen and repeat. - Read the words in pairs and correct each others mistakes. - Some individuals read the words aloud Sts listen to the T. Sts work in pairs to have a look at the table. - Listen and do the task. - Compare their notes. - Some sts report. Year Events (1) 1940 Born in Brazil
1956 (2) Joined in a Brazilian football club (3) 1962 championship (4) 1974 1977 First world cup 1200th goal (5) Retired
- Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have wrong answers. Sts work in pairs to read the questions
- Listen and do the task. - Compare their answer. - Play the tape once again, stop the tape - Some sts report. where necessary and conduct the correction. 1. He was fanous for his powerful kicking and controlling the ball. 4. After you listen: 2. He participated in 3 World
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to work in pairs and use the information in the table and the answers in Task 2 to talk about important events in Pele's life - Move round to check the activities and to make sure that sts are working effectively. - Ask some sts to present in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework: - Write a short paragraph about Pele.
Cups. 3. He played for an American football club before he retired. 4. He became an international ambassador for the sport. - Check their answer, and then correct their work if they have the wrong answer. - Work in pairs to talk about Pele's life. - Some sts present.
EXPERIENCES:
UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP LESSON 4 : WRITING Students absence
Notes
I. Objectives: - Students can write an announcement. II. Language focus: a. General knowledge: - An announcement concerning football.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
b. Language: - Language used to write an announcement. - The future tenses and the passive voice. III. Skills: - Reading: read the model announcement. - Speaking: discuss in pairs. - Writing: write an announcement. IV. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking : 5 - Ask one st to talk about the milestones - Listen to their friend and give in Pele's life. remarks. - Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give remarks. 2. Before you write: 20 - Aims: to get sts to know how to write an announcement. + Task 1: - Introduce the topic of the lesson: Writing an annoucement. - Listen to the teacher carefully. - Introduce some new words: +a'nnounce (v): thng bo + a'nnouncer (n):ngi thng bo + announcement (n): thng bo - Copy down the words into theit + co'mmittee (n): u ban notebooks. + post'pone (v):tr hon +due to (prep): v, do + se'vere (adj) : very bad. + con'tact (v):lin lc + The Ho Chi Minh Communist Youth Union : on Thanh nin Cng Sn H Ch Minh - Listen and repeat. - Ask sts to listen and repeat and then - Some sts stand up and read again. copy down these words into their - Read the announcement in pairs and notebooks. - Ask some sts to read these words again. then answer the questions that follow. - Work in pairs to ask and answer and - Ask sts to read the announcement in their notebooks and then work in pairs to then share their answer with their friends. answer the questions that follow. - Present their ideas. - Allow sts to work in pairs to ask and 1. The national football championship answer the questions orally. organizing committee is. - Move around to help if necessary. 2. The match between Nam Dinh and - Ask sts to compare their answer with Binh Duong. other pairs. 3. The match will be played at 3 p.m on
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Get feedback and give remarks. - Tell sts that these four questions are the main contents of an announcement.
Sunday, April 25th. 4. It will be played at My Dinh national Stadium. - Listen to the teacher.
- Read two situations. + Task 2: - Work in pairs to discuss two - Ask sts to read two situations in task 2. situations. - Ask them to work in pairs to answer the - Some pairs report. similar questions to those in task 1. + Situation 1: - Ask sts to create the time and the place 1. Nguyen Trai High School Football of the meeting in the first situation. Team. - Allow sts to work in pairs in 5 minutes. 2. The team are looking for new - Move around to help if necessary and to players for the new football season. check . 3. The first meeting of volunteers will - Ask sts compare their answers with be at 7 p.m on Sunday, April 15th. other pairs. 4. It will be at Hai Duong Central - Ask some pairs to report. Stadium. + Situation 2: 1. The HCM Communist Youth Union of NT High School. 2. A friendly match with New Stars Football Club. 3. It will be played at 5 p.m on Sunday, April 20th. 4. It will be played in the football field of New Stars Football Club. 10 - Listen to the teacher. - Correct sts' mistakes if there are any. 3. While you write: - Aims: Sts practise writing one of the two situations. - Ask sts to write down what they have - Do the writing task. discussed into their notebooks. - Let sts write in 10 minutes. - Read their writing: ( a model - Ask them to refer to the model announcement) 9 announcement in task 1 if necessary. " Nguyen Trai High School Football - Move around to conduct the activity. Team wishes to announce that the team 4. After you write: are looking for new players for the new Aims: to get feedback and check sts' football season. Volunteers must be work. good at football and are students of - Get feedback by asking some sts to read Nguyen Trai High School. The first their work aloud. meeting will take place at 7 p.m on - Ask some other sts to give remarks. Sunday, April 15th at Hai Duong - Check and give the correct answer. Central Stadium.If you want any
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- If there is enough time, T can have sts further information, you can contact exchange their writing among sts within a Nguyen Van Ba, class 10 of Chemistry group so that they can check their friend's or at 860.222." work and give remarks. 1 5. Homework: - Part D (page 84 - workbook). EXPERIENCES:
Date: 20/04/11 Period : 87 Class Date of teaching
UNIT 14: THE WORLD CUP LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 10 10 I. Objectives: - Students know how to pronounce the sound /g/ and /k/ correctly. - Students revise: - The uses of will. - The difference between will and be going to. II.Languge focus: + Language: - Pronunciation: /g/ and/k/ . - The uses of will. - Will vs. be going to. III. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. IV. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 5 1. Homework checking: - Ask two sts to read the announcements - Two sts read the announcements they wrote aloud. aloud. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Check and give marks. - Give remarks. 2. Pronunciation: - Listen to the teacher. 10 - Aims: to introduce two sounds /g/ and /k / and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask - Write down two sounds. sts to repeat. - Listen to the teacher and repeat. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Look at the book , listen and repeat. accurately. /g/ /k/ / k / : a voiceless sound group club / g / : a voiced sound game kick - Ask sts to pay attention to the length of together cup two sounds. ........................... - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen - Read these words in pairs and check and repeat. for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Move around to help . - Ask two sts to read again and give
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Look at the book and work in pairs. - Answers: /g/ /k/ group scored
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
remarks. b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 150 in the book. - Ask them to work in pairs to read the sentences and then find out the words containing sound /g / and sound /k / . - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud. - Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: 29 Aims: to revise the difference between will and be going to, and the uses of will, and have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. a. will vs. be going to: - Firstly ask sts to look at the examples and tell the difference E.g: - Wife: This dress looks beautiful. It must fit me well. Husband: Ok. I will buy it for you. - A: Why did you buy so much paint? B: I'm going to repaint my bedroom tomorrow. - Listen to the S and give remarks. - Ask sts to do task 1. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report. - Check and give remarks. b. Will: making predictions - Give an example so that sts can remember the use of will. E.g: A: I like that car very much but I don't have enough money to buy it. B: Ask Jack for some money, please. He is rich and generous. I'm sure he will lend you some.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
goal took Uruguay cat ............................... - Read the sentences.
- Listen to the T. - Look at the examples. - One st tells the difference: + Will: to talk about the future and the decision is made at the moment of speaking. + Be going to: to talk about intentions/ decisions which are made before we report them. - Some pairs report. 1. I'll get 2. I'm going to wash 3. are you going to paint 4. I'm going to buy 5. I'll show ................................... - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Read the example. - Pay attention to the underlined part. - Tell the T that will is used to talk about what the speaker predicts about the future. - Do the Ex individually. EX3: 1....he will help ..... 2. ... won't lend me .....
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to read the examples and tell the teacher the use of will in this situation. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to do Ex2 individually and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask two sts to write their answers on the board. - Check and give remarks. c. Will: making offer - Give an example so that sts can revise the use of will: E.g: A: I'm so tired but I still have a lot of work to do. B: Oh, I will help you to finish it. - Ask sts to do Ex 3. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to do this execise in pairs. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to report.
3. ... it will rain....... ................................. - Listen to the teacher. - Read the example. - Pay attention to the underlined part. - Tell the T the use of will in this situation: to make offer/ to show willingness. - Do the exercise in pairs. - Some pairs report: 1. I will make you a glass of orange juice. 2. I'll open it. 3. I'll lend you some. ................................ - Listen and correct their work if necessary.
- Check and give remarks. 1 5. Homework - Part B( page 81 - workbook) EXPERIENCES:
Date: 20/03/11 Period: 88 Class 10 Date of teaching
TEST YOURSELF E Students absence Notes
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 10 I. Objectives: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14. II. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 12, unit 13 and unit 14. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. III. Skills: listening, speaking and writing. IV. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. V. Procedures: T Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: 5 - Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the EX 4: workbook on the board. 2. It will look ....... 3. you will like... - Ask one st to give remarks. 4. you will get ....... 5. They'll be.... - Give remarks and marks. 6. we'll meet ..... 7. she'll come...... 8. I'll be.......... - One st gives remarks. 2. The new lesson: - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part IV at home in advance to save time. - Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 - Look at the textbook and read the minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. statements. - Ask sts to do listening in class. - Try to focus on the important words. 2.1. Listening: - Copy down these words into their 10 - Ask sts to read the requirement of notebooks. the task. - Listen and read after the teacher. - Introduce new words: + 'Jupiter (n): Sao Mc - Listen carefully and do the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers. + senior citizen (n): ngi gi - Some sts report. + re'duce (v): gim 1. 8.45 2. students - Play the tape twice and ask sts to 3. Mountain 4. are reduced do the task. 5. 7.30 - Ask sts to share their ideas with - work in groups to share their ideas. their partners. - Some sts stand up to report. - Get feedback and play the tape 1.He/She has to do a lot of practice and again so that sts can check their often spends a Saturday or Sunday answers. away from home. - Ask other sts to give remarks. 2. They are often played on Saturdays - Check and give feedback. and Sundays. 2.2. Reading: 3. To play against other school teams. - Ask sts to work in groups to
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
10 compare their answers. - Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud. - Listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: 2.3.1. - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. - Ask some sts to report. - Ask two other sts to give remarks. 10 - Check and give the correct answers. 2.3.2. to-infinitive: - Ask sts to share their answers with their friends. - Ask 2 sts to write on the board. - Check and give remarks. 2.4. Writing: - Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. - Ask some sts to give remarks.
3. Homework: - Part A ( Page 80 - workbook)
4. No. Sometimes parents, friends and other students will travel with them. 5. The whole school does.... - Discuss in groups. - Answers: 1. 0 2. the .3. 0 .4. 0 5.the 6. a .7. the 8. the 9. the 10. a - Compare their answers with their parners. - Write these sentences on the board. 1. I stayed in to watch a film on T.V. 2. I wrote them a letter to thank them for the weekend. 3. She went to university to study egineering. 4. You should go to Britain to improve your English. 5. You should book your tickets well in advance to see that football match. - Read their writing aloud " The monitor of class 10G wishes to announce that the musical performance of class 10G to raise money for the people in the flooded areas will be held at 7.30 p.m on Thursday, November 23rd in the school meeting hall. The ticket price is 5,000 VND." - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
EXPERIENCES: Date: 03/02/10 Forty five minute test Period: 89,90 I. Listening: You are going to listen to a talk about Maximilian. Listen carefully and decide if the following statements are true or false. Tick in the right box to indicate your answer. You will listen to the tape twice.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
T F 1. After leaving school, Maximilian worked on his brother's farm. 2. He left the village when he was 18. 3. The ship he worked on was sailing to the UK. 4. He made a lot of money on Wall Street. 5. He became a millionaire when he was 35. 6. His first wife was a model. 7. He lives with his first wife now. 8. Both of his daughters have become drug addicts. 9. He loves travels and he has visited every country in the world. 10 Neither he nor his brother is happy. . II. Reading: Complete the following passage by choosing one of the given phrases to fill in each blank. a. was watched b. elimination rounds c. organised by d. every four years e. elimination tournaments f. host nation g. the sport's governing body h. viewed and followed i. was held k. the final tournament World Cup is the most important competition in international football, and the world's most reprentative team sport event. (1) ...................... Federation Internationale de Football Association (FIFA), (2)................., the World Cup is contested by men's national football teams which are FIFA members. The World Cup is held (3) ................... (except in times of war), but the (4)................... of the competition (which narrows the field of as many as 197 teams down to the final 32 teams) take place over a three-year period, using regional (5)..................... The (6) ............... phase (often called the "Finalists") involves 32 national teams competing over a four-week period in a previously nominated (7).................... Only seven nations have won the World Cup Finals. The most recent football World Cup (8).................. in Germany between June 9 and July 10, 2006. The World Cup Finals is the most widely (9).................. sporting event in the world. The final match of the 2002 World Cup (10).................. by more than one billion people. III. Writing: Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous American pop star. 1. Cher/ born/ May 20th, 1946/ El Centro/ the USA. ............................................................................................................................
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
2. She/ leave/ high school/ when/ she/ 16/ and/ go/ Los Angeles ....................................................................................................... 3. She/ plan/ take/ acting lessons/ there. ................................................................................................................ 4. However,she/ meet/ Salvatore Bono/ there/ and/ become/ famous singer/ when/ she/ only/ 19. ............................................................................................................................... 5. Cher/ get married/ twice/ and/ have/ a daughter/ a son. .......................................................................................................................... 6. 1977/ she/ decide/ turn/ acting/ again. ................................................................................................................................... 7. Cher/ win/ Best Actress/ the Cannes Film Festival/ 1985/ and/ Oscar/ 1987. ............................................................................................................................ 8. Her long career/ Cher/ be/ successful/ both/ serious actress/ pop star. .................................................................................................................................. IV. Language Focus: A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1. a. laugh b. photo c. orphan d. Stephen 2. a. because b. tense c. nose d. please 3. a. village b. engineer c. age d. game 4. a. team b. bread c. meat d. season 5. a. God b. globe c. phone d. host B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. He didn't return to his native village until the war ended. It was not.......................................................................................................................... 2. We couldn't relax until all the guests had gone home. It was not ......................................................................................................................... 3. I only recognized him when he came into the light. It was not until.................................................................................................................. 4. Roger wants to buy a book, so he's gone to town. Roger has gone ............................................................................................................. 5. Jane wanted to earn some pocket money, so she got a part-time job. Jane got ....................................................................................................................... ANSWERS I. Listening: + key: 1- F 2-T 3-F 4-T 5-F 6-T 7-F 8-F 9-F 10 - F +Tape script:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
When he left school, Maximilian also started work on the family farm. But he soon became bored. Country life wasn't for him. And so at the age of 18 he left the village. He's only been back three times since then. He went to Buenos Aires and there he got a job on a ship that was sailing to the USA. On the ship he met a rich American businessman. He liked Maximilian and offered him a job. Maximilian learnt quickly and in the next ten years he made a lot of money on Wall Street. He became a millionaire when he was only 25. Since then he has been part of the international jet set. He's had three wives. When he was 30 he married a beautiful model, but she died two years later in a car crash. His second and third marriages both ended in divorce. For the last ten years he has lived alone in his luxury villa in the Bahamas. His family life has not been happy. Two years ago his son went to prison. One of his two daughters has become a drug addict. He's been on television several times and the newspapers have followed his life closely. For the whole of his life he has loved to travel. He's visited almost every country in the world. ' Yes, I've made a lot of money. I've been everywhere and I've done everything. But has it made me happy? Not really. Now look at my brother, Emilio. For several years his life hasn't changed at all. But he's happy. Yes, Emilio is a happy man.' II. Reading: (1) - c 2)- g (3) - d (4) - b (5)- e (6) - k (7) - f (8) - i (9) - h (10) - a III. Writing: Use the prompts below to make up complete sentences about Cher, a famous American pop star. 1. Cher was born on May 20th, 1946 in El Centro in the USA. 2. She left high school when she was 16 and went to Los Angeles. 3. She planned to take acting lessons there. 4. However, she met Salvatore Bono there and became a famous singer when she was only 19. 5. Cher got married twice and has a daughter and a son. 6. In 1977 she decided to turn to acting again. 7. Cher won the Best Actress at the Cannes Film Festival in 1985 and an Oscar 1987. 8. In her long career Cher has been successful both as a serious actress and as a pop star. IV. Language Focus: A. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. 1.- d ; 2 - b; 3 - d; 4 - b ; 5 - a. B. Complete the second sentence so that it it has a similar meaning to the first one. 1. It was not until the war ended that he returned to his native village. 2. It was not until all the guests had gone home that we could relax. 3. It was not until he came into the light that I recognized him. 4. Roger has gone to town to buy a book. 5. Jane got a part-time job to earn some pocket money.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
.................................................................................................................. .. Date: 04/02/10 Period : 91 UNIT 15: CITIES LESSON 1 : READING
I. Objectives: 1. Education aims: - Students know more about New York City. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Knowledge about New York City. b. Language: - The passive. - Vocabulary used to describe a city. 3. Skills: - Speaking : talk in pairs and in groups. - Reading comprehension: better sts' reading skill through guessing words' meanings in contexts, finding specific information. II. Anticipated problems: - Students may not have much knowledge about New York City. III. Teaching aids: board, textbook, chalk, some pictures. IV. Procedures: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up:(3 mins) - Ask sts some questions so that they can find - Listen to the T and find the out which city they are reading about. answer. What is the largest city in the USA? S1: New York City is the largest city Where is the Statue of Liberty situated? in the USA. - Introduce the topic of the lesson. S2: It is situated in New York. 2. Before you read:( 12 mins) - Listen to the T. Aims: To introduce the topic and provide sts with words/phrases about New York City. a. Answering questions: - Ask sts to look at the pictures of some wellknown places in New York and then ask them some questions: - Look at the pictures and answer Do you know these places? the T. What are they? Ss: Yes, we know. - Encourage sts to answer freely. S1: No 1 is the Empire State - Guide sts to read the names of these places Building. aloud. S2: No 2 is the United Nations - Ask them to match the names to the Headquarters. pictures. ................... - Ask sts to work in pairs to ask and answer - Work in pairs to ask and answer. the questions in Before you read. - Give answers orally. - Go round to help if necessary. 1. It is in the northeast of the USA. - Ask some sts to give answers. 2. Sts' answer. - Listen and check. Sts may give different ................................... answers. b.Vocabulary. - Others listen
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Provide sts with the new words/phrases: + lo'cate (v): t + 'harbour (n):bn cng + 'global (a): belong to globe + 'finance (n):ti chnh + 'business (n):kinh doanh +' characterise(v):c trng ho - Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask sts to repeat it. - Leave sts 1 minute to self-practice. - Ask 4-5 sts to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class( 1 st/ 1 time) - Listen and help sts to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read:( 20 mins) Aims: Read and guess the meanings of the words from contexts, and find specific information. + Task 1: Matching: - Ask sts to read the passage independently then read the words in column A as well as the definitions given in column B and scan the passage to match. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them try to guess the meanings of the words in contexts of the reading text. - Ask sts to share their answers with their partners. - Call on 5 sts to read their answers aloud in front of the class. - Get feedback and give remarks. + Task 2: True or False. - Ask sts to read the sentences in task 2 first, and focus their attention on key words. - Ask sts to read the passage independently and then decide whether the statements are true or false. - Tell sts to refer to Vocabulary for help and encourage them to try to scan the information as fast as possible. - Move round to help and ask sts to share their ideas and correct the false sentences. - Call on 5 sts to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Listen and read after the T. - Write down these words into their notebooks. - Listen and repeat. - Read these words and check for their partner. - Read the words aloud. - Listen to the T.
- Report their answers one by one. 1. - d 2-c 3 - e 4 -a 5-b - Listen to the T - Read the sentences first and try to focus on the key words. - Read the passage again and do the task. - Share their ideas with their friends. - Report their answers sentence by sentence. 1. T 2. F. It is ice-free in all seasons. 3. T. It is on the Hudson & Passaic River. 4. T 5. T - Listen to the T
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Feedback and give remarks. + Task 3: - Ask sts to read the passage again and work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. - Move around to help. - Ask sts to share the answers with their friends - Ask 5 pairs to give answers.
- Read the passage again and work in pairs to ask and answer. - Present their ideas: 1. It's in the southeastern part of New York state. 2. 7 million in the city and 19 million in the metropolitan region. 3. Because it was founded by the Dutch. ............................... - Listen to their friends and the T.
- Listen and check. 4. After you read:( 9 mins) Aims: to test sts' understanding about the reading passage. - Work in groups orally. - Ask sts to work in groups of three or four to discuss two questions. If you could visit New York, which place(s) of interest there would you like to see? Why?/ Why not? - Some sts report. - Go round to help sts with their work. - Some presentatives of the groups are required to report in front of the class. - Listen to the T. - Listen and help sts to give correct answers. 5. Homework:( 1 min) - Write a paragraph to answer the questions in After you read.
Date: 05/02/10 Period : 92
UNIT 15: CITIES LESSON 2 : SPEAKING
I. Objectives: 1. Education aims: - Students know about diferent cities. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Students can talk about the differences between London and New York. b. Language: - The comparative structures. - Vocabulary to describe a city. 3. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about the two cities.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Making the comparisions between London and New York. - Talking about the preferences and explain the reasons. II. Anticipated problems: Sts might have problem using the comparative form of short vs long adjectives fluently. III. Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, handouts. IV. Procedures: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm- up: (5 minutes) Aims : get used to the topic. - Divide the class into 2 big groups and introduce the quiz: T is going to read out the questions - Work in groups and find the about Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City. Sts need to answers quickly. listen and give the answers quickly. - The quiz: 1. Which city is larger in area- Hanoi or Ho Chi 1. Ho CHi Minh City. ( Area of Minh City? HCM: 2,095 km2, Hanoi: 921 2. Which city has a bigger population- Hanoi or km20 Ho Chi Minh City? 2. Ho Chi Minh City. ( pop. Of 3. Which city is older- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh HCM: 6. 2 milion, Hanoi: 3 City? milion) 4. Which city was known by more names through 3. Hanoi ( founded in 1010) history- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 4. Hanoi 5. Which city has more districts- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 5. Ho Chi Minh City 6. Which city is closer to the sea- Hanoi or Ho Chi Minh City? 6. Ho Chi Minh City 2. Before you speak: (8 minutes) Aims: : focus sts. on the topic and introduce the words and grammar used in the task. + Task 1: Complete each question in A with a suitable word in B - Ask S to do the task individually. - Listen to the T - Ask some S to go and write their answers on - Work individually. the board. - Some S write on board - Get feedback. - Answers: 3. While you speak: (20 minutes) 1-d 2- f 3- a-e Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two 4-a-e 5- b-c 6- c-b. cities . + Task 2: - Ask sts to work in pairs: One S read the infformation about New York city and the other - Work in pairs to ask and about London, then ask and asnwer about the answer. cities S1: Do you know when NY was - In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and founded? answer about New York and London using the S2: It was founded in 1624. And questions in Task 1. what about London? - Go around to check and offer help. S1: It was founded in 43AD.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Ask sts to share their answers with other pairs. - Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class and give feedback. - Listen and give remarks. + Task 3: - Introduce the task: S are going to work in pairs again and compare the two cities they have just asked and answer about. - Call on two students to read aloud the model conversation in the textbook. - Pay attention to the words and phrases printed in bold and review the comparative forms of Adjs and nouns: a Equal Comparison + Structure: S + V + as adj / adv as + S + Modal V/Aux V/Be NP Pro - Equal comparison of nouns: ......... as+ many/ few+ countable N+ as ..........as+ much/ little+ uncountable N+ as Eg.: as many parks as/ as much money as b Comparative form: + Structure: S+V+ comparative adj /adv +than+ S + Modal V/Aux V/Be NP Pro - Comparative nouns: more + count/ uncount N E.g: more buildings, more money - Ask S to work in pairs to compare the two cities, basing on the model conversation. - Go around to help Sts. - Ask some Sts to perform in front of the class. 4. After you speak: (10 minutes) Aim: S can talk about the preferences and give the reasons. + Task 4: - Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to talk about their preferences and to give reasons to back up their opinions. - Ask S to draw this table and take notes of their friends opinions . Name City preferred Reasons
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Ans what is the population of New York? S2: 7 milion. What about London? S1: 7 milion, too. Whats the area of New York? S2: It covers an area of 946 km2. And how large is London? ................................................. .. . - Read the model aloud. - Pay attention to the words/ phrases in bold. - Listen to the T and take notes.
- Work in pairs. - Compare the two cities. - Some pairs present in front of the clas - Work in groups to listen and take notes their opinions into the table. - some sts present: E.g.:Hoa prefers New York to London because people are friendlier and opener. Binh prefers living in London because there are more high buildings but Nga prefers working in London because there are more
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Go around to observe and offer help if holidays necessary. - Call some S to report their findings. - Give corrective feedback. 5. Homework: (2 minutes ) Write a paragraph about New York and London.
Date: 06/02/10 Period : 93
UNIT 15: CITIES LESSON 3 : LISTENING
1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students should appreciate a wonderful work of the French, the Statue of Liberty. 2. Lexical items - General knowledge: ss get the specific information about the Statue of Liberty. - Language: words related to the Statue of Liberty 3. Skills: Listen for specific information 4. Teaching aids: pictures of the Statue of Liberty, some pictures of some famous cities, posters, textbook Teachers Activities Warm up: (3minutes) Matching: - Use a poster: Match the names of the cities in column A with the names of the countries in column B - Correct * Pre-listening (6minutes) - Get Ss to work in pairs to answer 6 Qs in textbook 1. It is the Statue of Liberty 2. It is the Statue of a woman /It is tall/ It is big 3. It got a crown in her head 4. Its got a tablet in her left hand 5. Its holding a burning torch 6. Its wearing a robe * While-listening (23minutes) + Task 1. - Explain the instruction and has Ss read the task quickly in 1 minute before listening - Play the tape twice - Listen to Ssanswers(from 1-5) and get Ss to
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Students Activities - Go to the board and match the words Ssanswers may vary
- Read the task quickly - Listen and choose the correct answers
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
listen the last time to make sure that they can correct their answers by themselves. Answer key: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. C + Task 2 - Explain the instruction - Get Ss to read quickly Task 2 in 1 minute - Play the tape twice - Ask Ss what they have heard. - Listen to Ssanswers - Play the tape the last time to make sure that Ss can fill in the table enough with correct information Answer key Liberty Enlightening the World 46 meters 205 tons Copper (outside) and iron (frame) (Made of) stone and concrete 9.30 a.m to 5 p.m daily (everyday) except Christmas Day * Post- listening (13minutes) - Divide the class into 2 groups - Have Ss sit in groups of six and retell their friends what they have learnt about the Statue of Liberty, using the information in the table. - Go around to help students - Get 2 representatives of 2groups to present their talks - Give feedback Homework -Review the lesson Write a paragraph (about 50 words) about the Statue of Liberty
- Give their answers - Listen again to correct their answers
-Listen to teachers explanation - Read the task quickly - Listen to the tape and fill in the table - Give their answers - Listen to the tape and correct the answers
- Work in groups
- 2 Ss present their talks in front of class- Other Ss listen to their friends presentation
Comments:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 07/02/10 Period : 94
UNIT 15: CITIES LESSON 4 : WRITING
1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to write a paragraph describing a city. 2. Lexical items - Grammar : + Defining and non defining relative clauses + Simple present, simple past. - Vocabulary : Some new words related to the topic 3. Skills: Writing a short paragraph to describe the city which students know well. 4. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, textbook PROCEDURE: Teachers activities Students activities I. Warm up : (3) - ask some questions Answer 1. What do you know about London? (individually) 2. Do you like it? Give reason(s) II. Pre - writing : (15) - ask students to look at the pictures in the texbook - Work in groups, discuss, and - ask students to read paragraph in silence. answer the questions in task 1 - goes around class to help students - explains some structures when describing a city + (be) situated + cover an area of translati + (be) founded by on + (be) famous for + The best thing about is - Ask Ss to answer the questions. - Gives feedback - Answers 1. In southern English, on river Thames 2. It covers an are a of 1,610 square kilometres 3. 7 million 4. It is a capital city 5. It was founded by the roman in 43AD 6. It is famous for many things : such as St pauls cathedral and the houses of parliament, its museums and its many shops 7. The best thing about London is the park III. While - writing : (15) - Elicit some famous cities - Give the name of some famous Give cues cities in Viet Nam * HCM city : - Population about 8 million people - Area : 2,092 square km
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Founded : 1968 - Famous : BenThanh market, Duc Ba church. * CanTho : - Population - about 2 million people - Area : 2,964 square km - Founded : 2004 - Famous : Ninh Kieu pier, Can Tho port . - ask students some questions about each of them (questions in task 1) - ask Ss to write a paragraph to describe one of the above cities (based on Qs in task 1) by using posters. - Go around class to help students - ask groups of ss to exchange their writings - go around to help them if necessary - ask 1 Ss in each group to stick the posters on the board IV. Post - writing : (11) - correct mistakes - T & ss work together V. Homework : (1) - ask students to write a short paragraph about the province of Ben Tre
- work in groups to write about a city of their interest - exchange their writings and correct them each other - correct - do the work at home.
Comments:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 08/02/10 Period : 95
UNIT 15: CITIES LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
1. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to pronounce two sounds //, / / correctly; use Non- defining and defining Relative Clauses and Although correctly 2. Lexical items -pronunciation: //, / / - Non- defining and defining relative clauses -Although 3. Teaching aids: pictures, posters, textbook PROCEDURE: Teacher, s activities Students s activities Warm up.(3 mns) - Shows a picture of Toms family (3 brothers). - Asks:How many people are there in Tom s family? -five people - How many brothers are there in Tom s family? -Writes this sentence on the blackboard. three brothers There are three brothers in Tom s family. Pronuciation(12mns) Ex: There are three brothers in Toms family. // // -read in chorus. - asks students to read this sentence in chorus. -pronounce the sounds in chorus - ask them to pronounce two sounds: - describe how to pronounce the two sounds clearly. Activity 1: repeat after the teacher(3 times) Ask students to open their books page 164. pratise in pairs Ask them to listen and and repeat the words. pronounce - ask students to practise in pairs - get some students to pronounce these words individually before the class Activity 2 -Practise the sentences. -Repeat in chorus. (These sentences are written on a poster) -ask students to listen and repeat -get some ss to go to the blackboard and use two kinds of coloured chalk to underline the words pronounced //, / / -Practise -Teacher conduct correction -Read -Get ss to practise 3 minutes. -Get some ss to read these sentences individually. -Read in chorus. -Correct their mistakes. -Get students to read these sentences in chorus again
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Grammar(30mns) A. Exercise 1 Non-defining and defining relative clauses. Relative pronouns: which, who, whom, whose, that. Activity 1: -Show a picture of New York Harbour (textbook) Asks: What is it?. *Says: New York Harbour, which is ice-free in all seasons, is one of the largest and finest harbours in the world. - Write this sentence on the blackboard - explain the grammar note. Gives another example. *The man who lives next door is very friendly. -explains. @ Note That is not used in non-defining relative clauses Activity 2. Do exercise 1: -Give the instruction. -Ask students to work individually -Get ss to correct in pairs. -Get some students to do this exercise before the class. -Correct. B.Exercise 2 Connecting contrasting ideas: Although. Activity 1
-Answer: It is New York Harbour
-Copy down -Write down who lives next door is relative clause
-Work individually -Correct in pairs
- Answer: It is raining They are playing football
-Give an example -Ask questions: It What are they doing? -Say: Although it is raining,theyre still playing football. S V -Copy down -Write this sentence on the b.b -Explain -Ask students to look at the example in their textbooks -Take notes -analyse and explain -Work individually Teacher: T Vn Bnh Thaininh High School
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Comments: Date: 09/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES Period : 96 LESSON 1 : READING I. Objectives: 1. Education aim: - Sts know about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Sts can talk about Van Mieu Quoc Tu Giam. b.Language: Sts can recall more about: - The simple past tense. - Vocabulary to talk about historical places. 3. Skills: - Reading for general ideas and specific information. - Choosing the best suitable words and guessing in context. - Deciding on True or False statements. - Discussing in group. II. Teaching aids: - Textbook, blackboard, chalk, ... III. Anticipated problems: - Students may not have sufficient words to talk about the topic . IV. Procedure Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm-up: Network..(5minutes) - Ask students to work in groups of 3-4 students . - Ask the students to name some historical places in - Work in groups Vietnam. - After 2 minutes, the group which has the longest list will be the winner 2. Before you read: (8 minutes) Aims: To provide students with words/phrases about historical places. - Work in pairs. - Students are required to work in pairs to answer the questions in the textbook. - Go around to offer help S. - Ask some S to answer the questions. - Listen and help S to give correct answers. - Some S answer the Suggested answers: questions 1. Co Loa Citadel. Hoa Lu Capital. Con- Son- Kiep Bac Site. Den Hung Remains, Quang Tri Citadel, Hue Imperial
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
City. Hoi An City, etc. 2. Yes, it is. It is the first university of Vietnam. 3. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was founded in 1070 by the Ly Dynastry. It is one of the most visited places in Hanoi. - Give S some new words: * The new words/phrases are: + Confucian ( a): ngi theo o Khng, nh nho + engrave ( v): khc, trm tr + stelae ( n): bia + banyan trees ( n): cy a + tortoise ( n): con ra Read each word/phrase 3 times and ask the students to repeat it. Ask 4-5 students to read all the word/phrases aloud in front of the class (1 student/ 1 time) Listen and help the students to read the words/phrases correctly. 3. While you read: (20 minutes) Aims: Read for information to do the task, and do the tasks. Task 1: Guesing in context - Ask the students to read the passage indepently then find the italicised words in task 1. - Write these words on board: Originally, representative, memorialise, engrave, flourish. - Ask S to go back to the text to locate and underline these words and try to guess the meanings. - T might want to check that S understand all these words by callingon some S to tell the meanings in Vietnamese. - S are required to compare their answers with their partner. - Call on students to read and explain their answers aloud in front of the class. - Feedback and give correct answers: * Key: 1. b 2. a 3. c 4. b 5. c Task 2: Deciding on True or False statement - Ask S read the text more carefully and decide whether the statements are true (T) or false (F). Correct the false information. - Ask s to do the task individually and then check their answers with their friend. - Ask some representatives to give their choice orally in front of the class and explain their answers. - Listen and help S to give the right answer. Answer: 1. F ( it was built in 1070) 2. T 3. F ( from 11th century to 18th century)
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Read after the T and then read individually. - Listen and take notes -
- Work individually - Some S do the task orally while others listen.
- Read the text and do the task individually - Check the answers with a partner. - Some S present.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
4. F ( it is an example of well- preseved traditional Vietnamese architecture) 5. T 6. T 4. After you read: (10 minutes) Aims: S can talk briefly about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam. - Ask S to work in groups of 3 or 4 and prepare a talk about - Listen to the T Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam, using the suggestions in the - Work in groups textbook. - S take turn to talk - Go round to help the students with their work. about Van Mieu- Quoc - Ask some S to talk in front of the class and give feedback. Tu Giam. Suggested talk: Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam is a historical and cultural relic of Vietnam, which attracts a great number of visitors every year. Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam was built originally by the Ly dynasty in 1070 in Hanoi. Quoc Tu Giam was considered the first university of Vietnam, which was established on the grounds of Vietnam. Royal exams used to take place here and the first comers were honoured by having their names carved on the stone stelae. These talae were carried on the backs of giant tortoises, which can still be seen today. 5. Homework: (2 minutes) - Write a passage about Van Mieu- Quoc Tu Giam. Date: 10/02/10 UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES Period : 97 LESSON 2 : SPEAKING I/ Objectives 1. Education aims: - Sts know about the historical places . 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge: Sts can talk about a historical place. - Language: The simple past tense. Vocabulary on a historical place. 3. Skills: - Asking and answering questions about a historical place. - Talking about historical places. II/ Anticipated problems: Sts might not have sufficient vocabulary to talk about the topic. III/ Teaching aids: Textbook, chalk, board, handouts. IV/ Procedure: Teachers activities Students activities 1. Warm- up: (5 minutes) Aims : get used to the topic. - Introduce the game: You are going to work in groups to - Work in group. match the names of different historical places of interest in
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Hanoi with their English translatations. 1. Cha Mt Ct a. Presidential Palace 2. Ct C H Ni b. Temple of Literature 3. Bo tng Cch mng c. Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum 4. Vn Miu d. National Museum of Ethnology 5. Lng H Ch Tch e. Co Loa Citadel 6. Ph ch Tch f. National Museum of Fine Arts 7. Bo tng Dn tc hc g. One Pillar Pagoda 8. Bo tng Lch s h. Flag Tower of Hanoi 9. Bo tng M thut i. Revolution Museum 10. Thnh C Loa j. Vietnamese National History Museum - Go around to observe and check that S work. - Check with the whole class. 2. Before you speak: (8 minutes) Aims: : focus sts. on the topic and introduce the words and grammar used in the task. Task 1: Ask and answer about President Ho Chi Minh Mausoleum. - Ask S to study the fact sheet of the monuments and explain new words if any. + stand : place + late( adj): nguyn, c cu + maintenance ( n): bo dng - Ask S to read the model conversation in the textbook. - Ask S some questions as examples. - Ask S to work in pairs to ask and answer about President Ho Chi Minhs Mausoleum. - Go around to help S. - Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class. Suggested questions: + Where is it located? + When did the construction start? + When did the constuction finish? + How many floors are there? + What is the use of each floor? + What time is it open? + What time is it closed? + Is photography allowed inside? 3. While you speak: (20 minutes) Aims: Sts can ask and asnwer about the two historical places . Task 2: An information gap activity - Introduce the task: S going to ask and answer about Hue Imperial City and Thong Nhat Conference Hall. - Give S some new words:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Give the answers.: 1-e 4- b 7- d 10- e 2- h 5- c 8- j 3- i 6- a 9- f
- read the fact sheet and listen to the T.
- Read the model conversation. - Answer the teachers questions. - Work in pairs. - Some pairs present in front of the class.
- Listen and take notes.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
+ World Cultural Heritage:Di sn vn ho th gii + Comprise (v): bao gm + The Royal Citadel: Hong thnh + The Imperial Enclosure: Thnh ni + The Forbidden Purple City: T cm thnh + Admission: gi v vo ca + Reunification Hall: Dinh Thng nht + To be heavily damaged: b ph hu nng n + Air bombardment: nm bom + Chamber: phng - Ask S to work in pairs - In their pairs, Ss will take turn to ask and answer about two histirical places using the questions in task 1. - Go around to check and offer to help. - Call on some pairs to perform in front of the class and give feedback. 4. After you speak: (10 minutes) Aim: S can talk about the historical place they have been to. Task 3: - Introduce the task: S are going to work in groups to ask and answer questions about a historical place they have been to. - Remind S to take notes of their friends talk while listening so that they can report in front of the class. - Go around to help S . - Call some S to report their findings. - Give corrective feedback. 5. Homework: (2 minutes ) Write a paragraph to talk about a historical place .
Date: 11/02/10 Period : 98
UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES LESSON 3 : LISTENING
I. Objectives: 1. Educational aim: - Students should take part in maintaining and protecting the cultural and historical sites. 2. Knowledge:
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- General knowledge: Students learn about some historical places in Vietnam and all over the world. - Language: New words: the words related to description of historical and cultural places. 3. Skill: - Listening for gist and for specific information. II. Methods: Integrated, mainly communicative. III. Teaching aids: - World map. - Pictures of some historical sites in Vietnam and the world as well. IV. Procedure: Contents activities I. Warm up: (3ms) - Tell some historical places that you - Ask know. - Tell some historical places that you had chance to visit. Suggested names: - The Great Wall in China. - The Royal Citadel in Vietnam. - Ancient Capitals of Japan. II. Pre-listening: (a) - Explain the task after putting the five - Look at the pictures on pages 202, pictures on the board. 203 and match the word / phrases with - Ask ss opinion and give feedback. them. Suggested answer: 1. b 2.d 3.a 4.e 5.c - Give handouts and explain the task. III. While-listening: - Play the recording the 1st time. Task 1: (b) - Play the recording the 2nd time and let - Listen to a tour guide giving some ss discuss with their partners. information about transportation in - Play the recording the 3rd time and give Hue and choose the correct answers. feedback. Suggested answers: 1.D 2.C 3.C 4.A 5.B - Write the question on the board and have Ss discuss. Task 2: (c) - Listen to a tour guide talking to visitors about some attraction features of Hue & write short answers to the questions below:
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
- Ask ss opinion and do not correct mistakes. - Play the recording the 1st time.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
1. How long did the Nguyen Dynasty last? 2. Are the buildings in Hue varied in styles? 3. Where is Thien Mu Pagoda located? 4. Besides its ancient buildings and beautiful landscapes, what has made Hue more attractive? 5. What can tourists see in local villages? Suggested answers: 1. 143 years. 2. Yes, they are. 3. On the Perfume River. 4. Hues tradition dishes. 5. Skillful handicraft works. IV. Post-listening:
- Play the recording the 2nd time.
- Check ss task. - Play the recording the 3rd time, correct the task and give feedback.
- Let Ss listen again and help them to answer the five questions
- Assign homework.
Homework: Write a short paragraph about a historical place you have visited.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
Date: 12/02/10 Period : 99
UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES LESSON 4 : WRITING
I. Objectives: 1. Education Aims: - Students can describe a chart. 2. Knowledge: a. General knowledge: - Student knows how to read the information in a chart. b. Language: - Language used to describe a chart. - The past tenses. 3. Skills: - Reading: read the model description. - Speaking: discuss in pairs. - Writing: write a description. II. Anticipated problems: - Students are not familiar with this type of writing. III. Teaching Aids: - board, textbook, chalk. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking :( 5 mins) - Ask one st to talk about the ancient town of - Listen to their friend and give Hoi An. remarks. - Ask other sts to listen to their friend and give remarks. - Listen to the teacher. - Check and give remarks. 2. Before you write:( 20 mins) - Aims: to get sts to know how to write a description of a chart. + Task 1: - Firstly, ask sts to look at the chart and explain the information in the chart. - Read the chart and try to understand - Ask them to look at the chart and then the information in the chart. answer the questions in pairs. - Work in pairs to ask and answer and - Move around to help if necessary. then share their answer with their - Ask sts to compare their answer with other friends. pairs. - Present their ideas. 1. The USA had the biggest number of visitors to Vietnam in 2001. 2. 99,700 visitors. 3. Australia did.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Get feedback and give remarks. - Introduce some useful words/expressions that sts can use when describing a chart. + Beginning: Answer the question: " What does the chart show?" - Answer: The chart shows................. The chart presents some information .... +Expressions: As we can see from the chart, ............. It can be seen from the chart that ......... According to the chart, ................. + Verbs: increase >< decrease reduce, rise, ..... + Adverbs: rapidly, quickly, sharply, steadily, etc. + Comparatives and superlatives. 3. While you write:( 10 mins) - Aims: Sts practise describing the chart. + Task 2: - Ask sts to write a description of the chart. - Ask them to use the answers to the questions above to write. - Let sts write in 10 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. 4. After you write:( 9 mins) Aims: to get feedback and check sts' work. - Get feedback by asking some sts to read their work aloud. - Ask some other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answer. - If there is enough time, T can have sts exchange their writing among sts within a group so that they can check their friend's work and give remarks.
4. No, it isn't. 5. France did. 6. The number of American visitors to Vietnam in 2002 increased by 29,497 in comparison with that in 2001. - Listen to the teacher.
- Copy down these words into their notebooks.
- Read their writing: ( a model description) " The chart shows the number of visitor arrivals to Vietnam from the USA, France and Australia in 2001 and 2002. The statistics were provided by Vietnam National Administration of Tourism. It is clear from the chart that the number of visitors to Vietnam from the USA, France and Australia in 2002 is higher than that in 2001. According to the chart, the USA had the biggest number of visitors to Vietnam with 230,470 visitors in 2001 and 259,967 in 2002. France ranked second with 99,700 visitors in 2001 and 111,546 in 2002....... "
5. Homework: ( 1min)
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Part D (page 95 - workbook).
Date: 13/02/10 Period : 100
UNIT 16: HISTORICAL PLACES LESSON 5 : LANGUAGE FOCUS
I. Objectives: 1. Education Aims:- Students know how to pronounce the sound / / and / / correctly. - Students revise: - Comparatives and superlatives. 2. Knowledge: + Language: - Pronunciation: / / and/ / . - Comparatives and superlatives.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Making comparisons. 3. Skills: + Speaking: - Work in pairs to discuss the exercises. + Reading: - Read words and sentences aloud. - Read the sentences silently to do the exercises. II. Anticipated problems: - Students may forget the knowledge about comparisons. III. Teaching aids: - board, chalk, textbook. IV. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking: ( 5mins) - Ask two sts to read the description of the - Two sts read the announcements chart they wrote at home aloud. aloud. - Ask another st to give remarks. - Check and give marks. - Give remarks. 2. Pronunciation:( 10 mins) - Listen to the teacher. - Aims: to introduce two sounds / / and / / and help sts to practise these sounds. a. Write two sounds on the board and pronounce them clearly twice, then ask sts to repeat. - Write down two sounds. - Tell sts how to pronounce these sounds - Listen to the teacher and repeat. accurately. - Look at the book , listen and repeat. / / : a voiceless sound // // / / : a voiced sound television shop - Ask sts to pay attention to the length of two pleasure machine sounds. measure Swedish - Ask them to look at the textbook, listen and ........................... repeat. - Read these words in pairs and check for their partners. - Then ask sts to work in pairs to read the words again so that they can check for each other. - Look at the book and work in pairs. - Move around to help . - Answers: - Ask two sts to read again and give remarks. // // b. Ask sts to look at sentences in page 175 in pleasure shouldn't the book. Asia shop - Ask them to work in pairs to read the illusions washing sentences and then find out the words ............................... containing sound / / and sound / / . - Read the sentences. - Ask them to work in 2 minutes. - Move around to conduct the activity. - Ask one st to report and other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. - Ask some sts to read these sentences aloud.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Listen and give remarks. 3. Grammar: ( 29 mins) Aims: to revise comparatives and superlatives, and making comparisons, and have sts do EX1,EX2 and EX3. a. Comparatives and superlatives: - Firstly ask sts to look at the examples and revise the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives. E.g: My house is smaller than your house. My house is the smallest in this street. Exercise 1 is more difficult than exercise 2. Exercise 1 is the most difficult in this book. - Ask sts to tell the T the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives. - Listen to the S and give remarks. - Notes: Irregular adjs good => better => the best bad => worse => the worst far => further/farther => the furthest/farthest - Ask sts to do EX 1. + Exercise 1: - Ask sts to do Ex 1 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some pairs to report. - Check and give remarks. + Exercise 2: - Ask sts to read the requirement and the example carefully. - Ask sts to do the Ex individually. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask sts to share their ideas with their friends. - Ask two sts to write the sentences on the board. - Ask other sts to give remarks.
- Listen to the T. - Look at the examples. - One st tells the T the comparative and superlative form of the adjectives: Adjectives Comparatives Superlatives Short adjs .....- er the .....- est long longer the longest hot hotter the hottest .... ..... ...... ... Long adjs more ..... the most .... expensive more expensive the most ex. ....... .......... ....... ....
- Some sts report. 1. young => younger => the youngest 2. happy => happier => the happiest 3. big => bigger => the biggest 4. busy => busiest => the busiest ................................... - Listen and correct their work if necessary. - Read the requirement and the example carefully. - Do the Ex individually. 2. My sister is younger than me. 3. Who is the oldest in the class? 4. Concord used to be the fastest passenger plane in the world. ................................. - Listen to the teacher.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
b. Making comparisons: - Ask sts to EX3. + Exercise 3: - Ask sts to do Ex3 in pairs and then share the answers with their friends. - Move round to help if necessary. - Ask some sts to report in front of the whole class. - Check and give remarks. 5. Homework ( 1 min) - Part B( page 91 - workbook)
- Do the exercise in pairs. - Some sts report: 1. v 2. so 3. more 4. the 5. the 6. v 7. than 8. of 9. v ................................ - Listen and correct their work if necessary.
Date: 13/02/10 TEST YOURSELF F Period: 101 I. Objectives: 1. Aims: - Sts revise what they have learned in unit 15 and unit 16. 2. Knowledge: - General knowledge in unit 15 and unit 16. - Language: pronunciation and grammar in the above units. 3. Skills: listening, speaking and writing. II. Teaching aids: textbook, chalk, board. III. Procedures: Teacher's activities Students' activities 1. Homework checking:( 5 mins) - Ask one st to do Ex 4 in the workbook on EX 4: the board. 3. larger 4. the longest 5. the - Ask one st to give remarks. worst 6. happier 7. the most popular - Give remarks and marks. ........................... 2. The new lesson:( 39 minutes) - One st gives remarks. - Ask sts to do part II, part III and part IV at home in advance to save time.
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
- Give sts the time duration for each part : part II: 10 minutes, part III: 10 minutes, part IV: 15 minutes. - Ask sts to do listening in class. 2.1. Listening: - Ask sts to read the requirement of the task. - Play the tape twice and ask sts to do the task. - Ask sts to share their ideas with their partners. - Get feedback and play the tape again so that sts can check their answers. - Ask other sts to give remarks. - Check and give feedback. 2.2. Reading: - Ask sts to work in groups to compare their answers. - Ask some sts to report his/ her answers aloud. - Listen and check. 2.3. Grammar: 2.3.1. Non-defining Relative Clauses: - Ask sts to discuss their answers in groups. - Ask some sts to write on the board.
- Look at the textbook and read the statements. - Listen carefully and do the task. - Work in pairs to discuss their answers. - Some sts report. 1. three 2. friends 3. capital 4. crowds 5. noisy 6. interesting ............................ - work in groups to share their ideas. - Some sts stand up to report. 1. C 2. A 3. A 4. A 5. A - Discuss in groups. - Answers: 1. Their house, which is quite big and modern, .... 2. The new English teacher, who I met yesterday, ..... 3. Sandra has got a new job with Capital Insurers, which is a much ..... .......................................... - Compare their answers with their parners. - Answers: 1. bigger 2. best 3. better 4. more polluted 5. more stressful - Read their writing aloud "Taipei, which is the capital city of Taiwan, was founded in the 18th century. It has a population of 2.3 million. It is the country's most exciting city, but the weather there is very humid and not very pleasant. Taipei is a busy city, and the streets are always full of
- Ask two other sts to give remarks. - Check and give the correct answers. 2.3.2. Comparisons: - Ask sts to share their answers with their friends. - Ask some sts to report:. - Check and give remarks. 2.4. Writing: - Ask some sts to read their writing aloud. - Ask some sts to give remarks.
3. Homework: ( 1 min) - Part A ( Page 85 - workbook)

Teacher: T Vn Bnh
Lesson plan 10 2013
school year 2012-
people. It is famous for excellent museums." - Listen to the teacher's remarks.
Teacher: T Vn Bnh

Giao An Tieng Anh Lop 10 Tron Bo

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Giao An Tieng Anh Lop 10 Tron Bo

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Date of preparing:10/08/2012 Period 1:

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......

Thaininh High School

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

- The present simple tense.

S: seven thirty or half past seven.

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

S: He gets up at 2.00 p.m

- Think about theit daily activities and talk to their friends.

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

- Try to use English to talk.

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Thaininh High School

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

- listen and repeat. - Some individuals read the words aloud

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Date of preparing:16/08/2012 Period : 5 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching

UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

past simple to write.

5. Homework 1 - Ex 1, 2 (page 9) VI-EXPERIENCES:

Date of preparing:17/08/2012 Period : 6 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching

UNIT 1: A DAY IN THE LIFE OF......

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

4. Homework -Ex 1, 2 ( page 6)

Date of preparing:17/08/2012 Period: 7 Class 10 10 10 Date of teaching

UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

- Some sts read these words aloud.

Thaininh High School

Lesson plan 10 2013

school year 2012-

like love + V- ing V enjoy